Search

Search

[+] Advanced...

Author:

Region:

Sort:

«12. . .216217218219220221222. . .236237»

The Declaration of Falskt

Hall of Unity, Helsingstad

Dukes, lords and other nobility were gathering in the Hall of Unity, it was rather late for a meeting, but this was no meeting like any other, It was the meeting that would give start to an event that would shake all of Eskeland. Ever since the death of King Karl at the hands of an unknown assassin sent by an unknown contractor, the country has slowly been descending into chaos and madness. The council took the controversial, if not unpopular ,decision of sending the only heir into exile to the neighbouring country of Ryeongse, a decision that did not sit well with the people of Eskeland, since Ludvig was very popular with the people, however this did pave the way for the meeting that would take place.

Under the cover of the night, one by one, they all entered the building making their way to the main hall where a big table stood, set up for the occasion. Some of the ducal guards stood guard inside and outside of the building. Mikhail anxiously awaited, already sitting on his chair, indicating to them to take a seat as they came in, beside him was Vidar standing guard. The hall was well decorated and in it hung the banner that they would all fly from that day onward. Servants brought in ale and mead for the nobles.

Once everyone inside and in their places, Mikhail gave the order for everyone to keep quiet to allow him to begin, "Look at that..." He said in a hush tone, "Thank you everyone for coming here today, I am happy, as a matter of fact, everyone should be happy! I am more than proud to say that the time has come, the time to rise up against the false monarchy, to rise up against those who deny my rightful claim!" Applause came from the crowd, "Karl might be dead and his family exiled, but the council still denies my claim instead deciding to invite a Halder Prince, who's more close to being Hallish than Skeljaner. This "Prince" will come and take away everything that makes this country what it is, its traditions, its culture, its language, our way of living, and slowly replace it with his disgusting Hallish ways."

The crowd stood there, listening to his every word, one of the nobles, a certain Lord Haidegg, stood from his chair, he was one of the most loyal to the cause, and spoke, "Aye! I agree with you my liege, My people and I have been victims to this extermination of our culture, especially this new influx of elves into my domains, It has caused us more than enough problems and all because of that fool Ranaeril, the architect of what I call a crime against our people!" The other nobles who stood beside him all applauded in agreement with him, "We must stop them before it's too late, I stand with you my liege from the beginning until the end!" The nobles all stood up and began cheering, some were even heard chanting Mikhail's name.

"I am glad that everyone here supports my righteous claim and are more than willing to fight for it until the very end to achieve our goals. This isn't only about me, but all of us that have for years seen our country fall apart internally. The rule of the av Varbergs may have come to an end, but there is still a long path ahead of us to restore our country to its former glory, to the old days, and with Miskunn as my witness I swear I won't rest until it is done!" Mikhail picked up a piece of paper he had in his side and showed it to everyone, "I hold here a piece of paper, but not any piece of paper, this here contains the oath of loyalty, I will read to each of you the last sentence and if you accept you will say "Aye" and sign the paper with your name, this way I can know who amongst us here is truly committed to it and who decided to betray us by not raising his sword for the cause, let us begin!"

The nobles all lined up, except for someone by the name of Sven, a minor noble, who slipped out of the hall, without anyone noticing, at the very end. One by one they accepted the oath and signed their names in the paper. When everyone was done Mikhail raised the paper and spoke, "Now, with all these signatures this is no longer an ordinary piece of paper with some words written in it but a declaration, a declaration of rebellion against the false monarchy. I might sound hypocritical for mentioning this, but we must take an example out of the Hallish Revolt and fight for what we believe. Mikhail ended his speech with a toast, "In a week's time we ride for Junheim Castle, to a successful rebellion!" Everyone raised their cups and followed with a "Cheers!" and then they drank.

Few remained afterwards in small groups talking amongst each other. The majority left after the toast to be able to arrive in a good hour to their residences. Mikhail was pull aside by one of the lords, for a while he wanted to ask him a question in private but couldn't find the moment until now, "My lord" he said.

Mikhail turned to speak with whoever it was that called him out, "Yes? Oh, Lord Verdal, what is it you need of me? It is rather late and I believe you live quite far from here."

"Yes that is true my lord, but I had the urgency to ask you a question that had been bothering me for weeks now and now was the best moment to ask."

"Very well, go ahead, but mind you not, I do not have much time for talk."

"Yes yes, of course my lord. I am sure you are more than aware of the way King Karl died, I found it rather weird that shortly after his death you are taking advantage of the situation to execute your plan."

"And? Do you happen to have a problem with that?" Mikhail was starting to look rather angry at his words.

"No, of course not my lord, I just wanted to know if it was you who sent the assassin after him."

"No, it wasn't me and I do not know who it was either and I do not care, but I won't let an opportunity like this pass. Is that all? Now if you'll excuse me I have to be at the castle before midnight."

"Of course my lord, a thousand pardons for wasting your time like this." He apologised. In a way he was relieved that he didn't cause it, but at the same time he felt nervous that he didn't care. He was scared that whoever sent that assassin would come for Mikhail next or he could have simply been lying he thought to himself. Only time would tell.

Dhorvas, Syrduria, Ryeongse, and Brelogne

Post by Sane ballin suppressed by Rolais.

Hello

you mother trucker

you stole my wife

and my 2 kids

(61.751.078.12)

this you>>>>

hola

Post by Sane ballin suppressed by Rolais.

Sane ballin wrote:Hello

you mother trucker

you stole my wife

and my 2 kids

(61.751.078.12)

this you>>>>

hola

yoiur mother bug boobi

Of the Lost Hold, Heroes and the Path Ahead

“Heikur Redbeard, the Council of Torrent-Smiths will now hear you. Speak freely, Axe of Mazaruk, Foe-Feller, Red-Flame, humble recipient of these names and more. We have long missed your absence, rightfully earned.”

Heikur Redbeard had lost a bit of weight since the debacle at Barak-Izgil, though not so much that it was truly noticeable; more importantly, he had trimmed away a large portion of his once-impressive beard. The severed locks had been cast into a burning brazier lit in the memory of his fallen comrades, lost to the… he did not wish to think of it.

“The dead walk at Barak-Izgil.”

Six words were all it took for the quiet rumbling of the Mazaruki ruling council to be utterly silenced. One could hear only the shuddering, heavy breaths of the warrior as the memories of the past month struck him.

The voice of old Irkn Whiterush, head of the Council, gently encouraged Heikur to speak further. “I have known you since you were a young pup, Redbeard, ever since you first drew steel under the watch of the Goldfeathers. Never were you a man to shy from battle, to avoid saying exactly what must be said. I trust, then, that this is not a figure of speech?”

“It is not.”

“I see.”

There was no motion in the Great Hall of Mazaruk for some time. The head of Clan Whiterush, breaking the spell, rose from his seat. He descended the stony steps that raised the councilors above all others present, slowly hobbling down to Heikur’s position. Irkn placed a trembling hand on the younger dwarf’s shoulder, saying nothing.

“They took the rest of us,” Heikur whispered, wringing his hands together. “A wrong that can never be righted.”

“We will right the wrong by carrying on, by not forgetting the lost, by not being cowed into inaction,” Irkn said, and there were general murmurs of assent in the room. “We will write the wrong by telling the story of your fallen friends. The Citadel of the Moon may well be lost to us for now, but there will come a day when we’ve enough axes and flame to cleanse it to its depths. That day will come, I promise you that, Heikur Redbeard, and I am only as good as my word.”

“Hear, hear,” called out some of the councilors, though the mood in the room was unmistakably somber. As firm and hopeful as Irkn’s pledge had been, plans needed to change. Heikur drew from his pack one of the record books he had taken from the record-hall of Barak-Izgil, opening it and beginning to read.

“Mazaruk has shut its gates. We are alone,” the hollow voice began, “and our so-called protectors have not offered so much as to give us sharpened axes or black powder for the few cannons we have. The upper city is lost to shambling death. We will soon find the same fate. A thousand damnations for the Torrent-Hold! They could not hold back so much as a trickle of water, let alone the deluge that gives them their beloved name.”

“Why do we have no record of this?” One councilor demanded, his voice shaking with displeasure. “Why do we only now learn of the treachery of our forefathers?”

The room rumbled with angry murmurs. Though the question was valid, a deceased dwarf who had not been exiled from his clan was typically considered to be beyond even the gentlest criticism. That said, a wrong had been done, and most of the dwarves present recognized this.

“Do you think that it is convenient for us to record our wrongdoings, Master Jadecarver? Our tenth-fathers saw their decision was ill-done, and they would not have it color our memories of them. Now we know,” observed Irkn Whiterush, “now we know.” He turned to the councilors, still gathered on their raised platform. “What news of the other delvings? Is only Barak Izgil lost to us?”

“New deposits of iron west and north-west of Khelegin,” noted Barek Broadaxe, the adventurer-turned-governor who had been entrusted with lands along the northern shores of Lake Mazar. “I’ve authorized the miners to break ground. We’ve been digging away for a fair while now, and there’s no sign of the deposits running dry in any rush.”

“Tools and equipment, Master Broadaxe,” Irkn stated. “We will need plenty of both.”

“Equipment of what sort, Master Whiterush?”

“You’ll be equipping ships soon enough. We need to look abroad, beyond these hills; our legs will only carry us so far, and that damned chasm is close enough to us to more or less cut off our western exploration.”

“We will need somewhere to build these ships,” the normally-silent Tiri Goldfeather called out. “My scouts have found an old port to the east of here. It is quiet and there is sediment to be removed before a proper ship could be launched, but these are small obstacles. I will have camps set up in the stretch between here and that port, but I’ll need craftsmen and their families to move out there if we are to produce any exploratory ships.”

“Timber, too, and cloth for the rigging,” added Verdar Jadecarver, whose observation was quickly followed by another few words from Master Goldfeather.

“We’ve no need to look further for the textiles. My men have found tall-folk to the northeast, and they are of a friendly disposition. Something of an agreement has been made - they send us their lesser metals and clothwork, and they receive dwarven iron. They are quite starved for the stuff, so it seems.”

A sigh of relief.

“We are not alone, then,” Irkn Whiterush smiled. “There will be others.”

“Blacklight yet stands,” Tiri added, and for a moment, every dwarf present in the Chamber of the Torrent-Smiths could lay aside his distress over the fate of the Citadel of the Moon. “It was the first question the scouts asked these… Eskelians, as they call themselves. We are not the only dwarves who yet draw breath.”

“I can conceive of no news more joyous than this - a day of highs and lows, indeed! A Mazaruki dwarf will soon set foot in the First City, then - indeed, I think I shall have to commission an ode from the Musician Guild once this meeting is concluded. Until such a time, however… I fear I must redirect us towards the matter at hand. First, the port. Then, the ships, then we find folk who are just as amenable to cooperation as these Eskelians. We can ill afford to make the same mistakes as the Mazaruk of old; it is their inaction that caused the ruin of Barak Izgil, and it is our actions that will eventually cure it.”

“My mind yet rests on the matter of our incomplete records,” a new voice declared. Young Jorman Blackmoon, a new councilor who had recently come to prominence for his efforts in the reclamation of Khelegin, was known for his particularly strong sense of honor. “The misdeeds of our great-fathers must be atoned for. I motion on the behalf of the Blackmoon Clan for the drafting of a statement acknowledging this ancient failure and reaffirming our pledge to do what is right for Dwarfkind.”

“Seconded.”

“Aye.”

“Aye.”

“Acknowledged,” Irkn nodded, glancing over at Heikur Redbeard, who had been silent for quite some time. “We must not settle for a simple written or spoken statement. Barek Broadaxe! You’ve plans for the memorial at Khelegin - if I send you more Whiterush carvers, will you be able to accommodate an expansion of those plans to immortalize the people of Barak-Izgil?”

“They will have a place of honour at Khelegin, and I pray that I will live long enough to carve the first rune into the Citadel of the Moon,” cried the Thane of Khelegin. “Aye! I’ll have Redbeard carving on the project, too, if he’ll oblige me.” Heikur nodded slowly, a small smile creeping onto his face.

“Yes, I could do that.”

As the meeting of the Council of Torrent-Smiths came to a close, Irkn Whiterush hobbled back to his chambers. It was a short trip; as his strength abated, as a show of reverence, the councilors agreed to meet ever closer to him. As the great wooden door to his room was opened for him, the ailing dwarf fell into his armchair with a sigh.

He felt the carved wood with aching fingers, appreciating the artistry that had gone into the chair’s making. Here was good dwarven work, work much like that which was once done at Barak Izgil. Irkn drew a shallow breath, muttering to himself.

“There is no greater dishonor than your betrayal of the outer holds,” he whispered, clenching a fist. “Even the finest craftsmanship does not make up for this evil.”

A millennium and a half had passed since the establishment of Mazaruk, and its sister holds were only slightly younger. The most ancient records showed that a single large group had departed the venerable city of Blacklight in what the Mazaruki named the Time of Strife. At some point in this journey, the group split: most made their home in Mazaruk, but brothers and sisters had parted ways to find other homes along the shores of Mazar.

Brothers and sisters.

Blacklight still stood, they had learned. The Mazaruki were not alone, but perhaps they deserved to be. Perhaps they deserved the fate of Barak Izgil for the centuries-old treachery of their forefathers. Perhaps the ancestors of the Mazaruki did not deserve the…

…he could not finish the thought. It was too much for his heart on this night, and there was work to be done. Clan Whiterush could not simply let go of the reins and encourage its steed to trample them - the world needed to know. If their ancestors had done evil in abandoning Barak Izgil to a fate worse than even that of Khelegin, they would simply have to acknowledge these faults and work around them in their worship.

Did the same happen to Khelegin? Were they, too, shut out of the hold in their time of need? It was not a large leap to make, but to abandon two thirds of their realm to extermination was a concept too terrible for Irkn to contemplate - and yet the possibility gnawed at his mind, threatening to surface and damage the very core of what defined him, his kind: an unshakeable faith in the good natures of those who came before them. He had to think of other things.

Could Barak Izgil be retaken? It was possible, he supposed, though the thought of the Mazaruki taking the city they had left to rot nearly nauseated him. He would not, so long as he lived, permit it to become a city once more. Not unless there were somehow Izgili who had endured at the city’s depths; an incredibly unlikely act of providence.

A sharp knock at the door broke Irkn’s spell. “Enter,” he croaked, wearily turning his chair slightly to face the door. In strode the Young Ox and his younger brother: Gunnar and Tyrr Whiterush, the eldest sons of the aging patriarch. A fond smile curled upwards beneath a beard that had long since grown gray with stress and age, and the two brothers knelt down for a brief moment in deference before glancing at each other excitedly. They silently decided who would speak first in that unheard language that siblings often exhibited, with Gunnar stepping forward.

“There’s the Ox,” Irkn chuckled, reaching up to pat his son on the shoulder. “What news from the front, eh, boy?”

“More iron than we know what to do with, and I hear ol’ Khelegin is in much the same predicament. Cave mushroom cultivars in the deep, too - we’re quite well positioned to take advantage of both. Whiterush Hall will be a second Mazaruk,” Gunnar began.

“Whiterush Hall… that’s to be your great project then, Gunnar?” The question was in reference to a Mazaruki rite of passage, one that was undertaken by every clansman who was able to pursue it to its conclusion. They were to pour their effort into one work of craft for an extended period of time, creating at least one object of extreme merit for the good of their clan and hold.

“I can think of no better - it will be Tyrr’s, too, as there is more than enough work to go around for the two of us.”

“There is no finer work than the forging of a city! Aye, I’ll endorse that,” Irkn nodded enthusiastically. Suddenly, he remembered just why he could not allow Mazaruk to suffer for the sins of its fathers: here was a generation of heroes and pioneers, craftsmen and warriors. A pride for his sons, his clan - a dwarven pride, one that burned like the forge’s fire - was kindled within his heart.

“How did the Council meeting go, Father?” Tyrr’s voice was quieter, his eyes inquisitive. “Did you hear much from Redbeard? The expedition to the Citadel of the Moon has been the talk of the camp, but nobody is quite sure what happened.”

Irkn faltered, unsure of what to say. He did not wish to ruin the spirits of his sons, but they would find out one way or another. “It was filled with the undead,” he said, simply. Gunnar and Tyrr looked at each other once more, evidently unsure as to what should be said. “The threat appears to be limited to Barak Izgil. You are not at risk, and neither are any of our settlements.”

“I always thought the undead were mere stories,” Tyrr placed a nervous hand to his cheek, running it through his beard. “Inventions. Something you old grumblers made up to keep us from darting all over the place at night.”

“As did our fathers and their fathers’ fathers,” Irkn replied, sighing. “As did I. We have no reason in the world to not believe Heikur Redbeard, however, and our oldest records spoke of a… sundering, of sorts, concerning the damned Black Fault. We’ve also confirmed that this cursed place still plagues this world, and it is no less dangerous than it once was.”

“Dire indeed,” Gunnar observed. “We’ll have to build our walls high and mighty. Cannons and crossbows, guns, hammers and axes. I am not in any mood to be overcome by the dead.”

“Few are,” muttered Tyrr. “There’s something that would have gone unspoken.”

“Nevertheless, I have spoken it.”

“Mm.” Dwarven humor was best described as peculiar. It often reared its head in the direst of situations; to most, it appeared to be pointless bickering, but the Mazaruki could sense a momentary dissipation of the tension that Barak Izgil’s state had caused. “Do you have any plans for the city, Father?”

“We will not inhabit it. I’ve plans for a settlement along the coast to make up for the loss; perhaps we will one day turn Barak Izgil nto a shrine of some sorts. I do not think we could convince many to move into a city that was infested with shambling corpses, even once they are cleared out. I am reminded somewhat of the cave-spider fiasco in the Undercity a decade ago. Entire blocks of Mazaruk abandoned! Abandoned! We had to… aah, that’s besides the point. No, I think there are better places for our people to go.”

“Along the coast, you say?” Tyrr raised an eyebrow. “I suppose we’ve a better track record with rafts than the undead, but… do we know of anything that would give us reason to want ships?”

“You have a new market for your iron,” Irkn added with a wink. “Tall-folk.”

“Thank the Ancestors,” Gunnar muttered. “Then the world is much larger than my chambers and Tyrr’s. Perhaps I’ll find someone who bothers me less.” The dwarf took an elbow to the gut for the remark, though he still seemed quite satisfied with himself. “Nuisances aside, that is encouraging news. They are friendly, these tall-folk?”

“Friendly? I do not know. They are hungry for our work, however, and that is the important thing. This only increases the importance of your mission - I will wager that there are more people nearby, and that they are just as interested in what we have to offer. You’ll want to build as large of a stockpile as you can manage.”

“Excellent,” Tyrr nodded. “We can manage that. We’ve drawn up plans for a new series of water-hammers to break ore, and the new bloomeries are all but operational. Our first proper ingots are no more than a week or two away, barring any major hiccups. I hear the Jadecarver glassworks are already operational?”

“Indeed they are, so you’ll need to hurry up! The Jadecarvers will be searching for their own clients soon enough, but it’s iron that Whiterushes thrive on. Dig deep, dig fast!”

“Aye!”

With that, two generations of Clan Whiterush settled down for the evening. There would be a meal and more planning, but the most important strokes had already been drawn. The fires of industry had been kindled, and an entire nation had been stirred to action by the fate of its long-lost sibling. Whatever failures of old had come and gone, what mattered now was how they were handled; Mazaruk would grow only stronger from understanding what had once gone wrong.

All across the shores of Mazar and beyond, the clanging of hammers and the humming of work songs became the backdrop for new stories of the lost heroes of Barak Izgil, and what wrongs had been done - and how they could be righted. The Torrent-Smiths of old would conceal the truth for fear of losing the favor of their sons, but the awakened Mazaruki would not tolerate deceit. Pamphlets and criers described what ills had been done, and Mazaruki, wherever they stood, promised to their ancestors that they would do better. They would build a realm to stand the test of time, one that would never have its resolve to protect its people break or bend. They would tell the tale of the lost hold, her heroes, and the path ahead.

There was no alternative.

Elvhenen, Dhorvas, Namalar, Riddenheim, and 3 othersRyeongse, Eskeland, and Straulechen

Divided Dhorvatai
Dhorvas civil war part 1
Development post

The streets in Dhorvatai were bustling with activity. Merchants were peddling their wares from the outer reaches of the city or farmlands beyond it. People largely continued as they had for years. One might have forgotten there was a war, if not for the large number of armed patrols. Dhorvatai had always had patrols, but these were all clad in the azure and gold of the dhoshur and dhoshen guards. Salar had watched the fourth such patrol pass by his spot near a meat vendor along the main road toward the center of the city. The fourth in just over an hour.

It seemed to him that they were rather paranoid, but then the guards only controlled the capital. When the last sahraqan had died and the council had failed to elect a new one, they seized control. In their own words, they were *protecting* Dhorvatai until the culprits could be found and punished.

Salar smirked at the thought. They were essentially declaring an indefinite reign. It was still unknown just who had been behind the assassination of Sahraqan Okin. Many had blamed the rebelling Renatists for the attack. It was not an unreasonable assumption given that Okin had handed over their leader to the orthodox artyanists in Northern Kivoruhn, who had promptly executed the man quite publicly.

There had been, however, very little real evidence, merely accusations leveled upon the religious group and even at others with influence in the council. To declare guardianship until the truth had been found was just as well declaring themselves successors. No one would likely know who had committed the act. More importantly, thought Salar, no one any longer cared. The ensuing build up by the regional juvemqans and other leaders and the outbreak of war had shoved such concerns aside. All that mattered now was who would win.

This was why Salar was here. While its purpose was largely symbolic, many factions sought control of the capital to cement or at least give legitimacy to their claims. The faction Salar served was not any different in this regard. The problem was the dhoshen and dhoshur. His job was to find information they could use, and if able, stir some trouble. The two guard groups had different leaders. In theory, the dhoshur were a part of the dhoshen, but they specifically guarded the sahraqan so many of them believed they were better than the other dhoshen members. Salar had already seen issues occur between the two factions and was confident that discord could be sewn between them with the right assistance.

After watching another patrol, Salar decided it was time to move on from his present spot, lest he be seen there too long. He did not need questions for loitering, especially in these times. It was just as well as the scents from the butcher’s stall were beginning to make his mouth water. He decided it was time for a meal.

Salar followed the central road that ran the length of Dhorvatai through the center of the city. The road would eventually lead him to the Grand Yurt of the Sahraqan, presently occupied by the leader of the dhoshur; Golma. Delche, leader of the rest of the dhoshen, had her own headquarters elsewhere in the city, something Salar was sure only added to the rivalry between the two factions. His own path would not take him to the yurt but to a tavern just past the religious quarter and before the quarter that generally housed the soldiers and was now home to mostly members of the guards. This location made it very popular, and Salar could fill his stomach while still listening for information.

Salar glanced up to the sign above the entrance before stepping inside. The tavern was called The Lost Rock. It was owned and run by a dwarf named Thadren. Dwarves did not generally care for khemakh. The feeling was often mutual. The story, as he had heard in passing one night in the tavern, was that the dwarf had been a soldier with blacklight. When the dwarves had been present during a ceremony after one of the previous crises over a decade before, this one had accidently been drunk and left behind. Salar doubted the story was true, but it made for a fun telling and he was sure the dwarf half encouraged the stories himself, and enjoyed the customers it helped bring. The fact that dwarven ale was better than what his own people made helped too.

Salar made his way to his preferred spot; a small table toward the back where he generally went less noticed, which was good for both observing and eating in peace. A servant brought him a meal of meat stew and bread and Salar placed a few coins for pay. Salar savored a bite of stew before looking around to see who shared his company tonight. Most were other citizens in the city. He spotted a couple of merchants who appeared to be haggling while they ate. A stray elf sat alone in a corner and glanced around themselves awkwardly, very aware of how out of place they looked. There were a number of dhoshen guards as well, as there often were. He caught sight of the dwarf coming up a staircase that led below. The tavern was more than a place for a meal, it was also an inn and a warehouse where the dwarf peddled other goods; unique salts from Elvhenen and tea and tobacco from Ryeongse, though his supplies were likely hampered by the war.

Salar’s attention shifted suddenly to the door as it swung open and revealed a new group of dhoshen guards. Unlike those already seated inside, these ones were Dhoshur. Salar could tell from the red sun on the center of their armor. Dhoshen armor was generally azure and gold, with a golden sun on the chest, a representation of Sahnra, the more dominant khemakh god since the Dhorva who had united Dhorvas were followers of the sky god. They wore no helms, another old khemakh custom. At some point, the dhoshur began painting the golden sun red on their armor to distinguish themselves from the regular dhoshen. Yet another practice that promoted animosity among them.

Two were khemakh but one of the three was a tall and stocky dsen. The group moved through the tavern as most people within cleared a path before them. They stopped just before a large table where several dhoshen were already seated. Though the dhoshen had meals, none of them were eating, their eyes had been fixed on the dhoshur as soon as they arrived. Salar could feel the tension in the air.

“You’re in our spot. Lesser dhoshen sit toward the back.” growled the khemakh that led the other dhoshur. He was the largest of the three with dark coal grey scales.

“There are no lesser dhoshen!” said one of the seated khemakh angrily.

The dsen among the dhoshur dropped their sword on the table with some force, clearly making a show of it. Several of the dhoshen jumped up from their seats and several stools went rolling back among the other tables.

“That’s enough!” came a shout and most turned to the dwarf who had come to stand between the two groups. Salar was impressed, both at the dwarf’s speed and having the spine to get between the two groups. 'I’ll not have you making a mess of my place.”

“We will act as we please, dwarf.” said the dsen. “We make the rules here in Dhorvatai.”

“Well as that be, Golma respects my rights to say on my own property. Or shall I take it up with her? I’m sure she needs another headache right now and would thank you for it. If a fight’s what you want, take it outside so I don’t have to clean up after you lot.”

Before the dsen could argue, the khemakh that led them raised his hand. “We’ll leave it for now. There are places less cramped with lesser dhoshen anyway.” he said and then turned to leave with the others laughing and following him out.

A collective sigh seemed to cross the room though Salar could still feel the tension. He picked up his half eaten stew and approached the dwarf.

“You handled that well, I was expecting a brawl.” Salar said to Thadren.

“Not the first time I’ve had to deal with their sh!t.” said Thadren. “Fortunately Aimur knows Golma holds his leash, though I’d pray to any of your lizard gods for her to reign it in a bit…no offense meant,” he added with a look to Salar as though he only then realized he was talking to a khemakh.

“None taken. I’m not sure they’d help anyway.” Salar remarked. Thadren gave a snort. “That Aimur, he is close to Golma then?”

Thadren raised an eyebrow as he eyed Salar again. “You new to Dhorvatai?”

“Well, somewhat”, Salar admitted. Being honest was often a good way to get information he found. “Been stuck here a bit with the mess.”

“You and half the city!” sighed Thadren. “Aimur is one of her main commanders, a second you could say, one of them anyway.”

“Ah. Rather quarrelsome for a person of his standing, isn’t he?”

“That he sadly is, though everyone seems to be looking for a fight these days.” The dwarf took notice of his half empty bowl and then waved his hand toward the door. “But enough of that. Can I get you anything? An ale to ease the tension? An ale for everybody!” he then boomed loudly. A chorus of cheers erupted in response and several servants began pouring ale for the eager crowd.

Salar smiled and gave his thanks before returning to his table with a fresh mug of dwarven finest. The ale was good, and it did much to ease his mind and that of the room, but his thoughts were focused on Aimur and new plans were beginning to work their way in his mind as he finished his stew.

*****

Aimur watched as Ji-Hae continued to kick the human merchant, laughing as he did. A smirk split along Aimur’s long jaw. They were doing their usual protection rounds, demanding their weekly payment from those who benefited from their so-called protection. Being an officer in the Dhoshur was prestigious, but the coin it brought was lessened with the chaos in Dhorvas. Their protection put a bit more into his pockets. When someone decided they did not want to pay for their help any longer, they persuaded them to reconsider.

“I think he gets the message Ji-Hae. Collect his donation, we have others to visit yet before Golma’s meeting.” Aimur said to his overly enthusiastic partner. Ji-Hae looked up and Aimur thought he saw disappointment in his eyes. The dsen enjoyed this too much. He laughed a bit to himself at the thought.

The two made their way down one of the smaller roads that branched from the main road of Dhorvatai and splintered through the various quarters that made up the city. They were in the merchant quarter and had been for much of the morning, weighing their pockets with coins. It was how they spend the start of each new week.

“Couple surogs, five luwon, mostly some kivoruhn kunari,” Ji-hae said, listing various forms of currency found in Dhorvas. The surog was the currency established under the new order when Dhorvas united, but the older dsen luwon and kunari of northern kivoruhn were still used. Occasionally they found merchants using other foreign currency when they needed to.

“There is much yet to collect this morning.” said Aimur.

“I look forward to what we find.” replied Ji-Hae.

Aimur smirked again and was about to reply when a sound caught his ear. He paused, listening for it. He had almost decided he had imagined it when he heard it again. A shout? No, someone crying out? He turned down one of the small alleys that branched off the proper roads. After turning a corner he found himself in an open space.

“Did you catch that, Ji-Hae?” he asked. When Ji-hae did not reply he turned and found that he was alone. He cursed. Was Ji-Hae too busy counting coins to notice he had turned off the road? He was beginning to go back when he heard it again. It was definitely some sort of cry, yet he could not quite make it out fully. A child maybe? He did not think it was just an animal. He continued down another alley, then another. The quarters were maze-like once you moved from the roads into the alley ways that wound through the buildings. Once most of these were still yurts, but over a decade of building and the influx of more people had created a vast network of structures.

Aimur finally exited another alley into a small open area. There were no other alley ways to follow and the area seemed completely walled in by the surrounding buildings, as if someone had neglected the paths here and accidentally built the structures right against one another. Only the alley behind him let into the strange little alcove. There was a door directly before him that led seemingly into the wall ahead. Perhaps there was an exit out on the other side.

The cry echoed again. It was coming from inside. Aimur drew his sword and moved forward to open the door. The inside was lit by many lanterns and candles. It was a single large room, adorned with rugs and cushions. A meeting place of some sort, perhaps a gambling den. Another door opposite him led to another room. He could not find the source for the cry. Perhaps it lay in the next room.

He approached the door cautiously, sword raised. He reached for the door but then recoiled. Something was wrong. The light was dimming. He could see a darkness that seemed as much in his head as around him and before he could turn or swing his sword in panic, everything went dark.

*****

Aimur awoke with a start and in pain as if someone had just slapped him. He felt it again and his senses began to assert themselves. He was in a small, dimly lit room. Light filtered in from the lone door and he could see the familiar rugs and lanterns in the room beyond the door. He was in the room he had been about to enter before everything had gone dark.

As his eyes adjusted he realized he was not alone. At least three others stood in the room with him. His reflexes wanted to reach for his sword and it was then he realized that he was bound to a chair, his sword likely long gone. His movement made a creaking noise in his bonds and the others in the room seemed to note that he was regaining his awareness. One of them approached and the light revealed another khemakh, one smaller than himself with scales dark and gleaming, though it may have been a trick of the light.

“Hello, Aimur. I am glad you could join us for a moment.” said the other khemakh.

“Who are you? What do you want? Do you understand the mistake you have made by binding me?” Aimur began spitting questions.

“My name is Salar, though it will do you little good to know it as you will not get to make much use of it I fear.”

Aimur caught the threat in his words. Even bound and in a disadvantaged position he still found the anger boiling in him and glared at the one named Salar. His eyes looked between the other two.

“Ah, you need not know their names. They are colleagues of mine, suffice it to say. Quite helpful ones at that. Did you enjoy the little display they put on for you? Mysticism is quite a bit of fun. They can confuse you and dazzle your mind with so many illusions. A wall that is not there, a person. Even sounds to lure you where we want you to go.”

So that was it, thought Aimur. They had used a mystic to trick him with the illusion of someone crying out. And he had taken the bait. What a damned fool. If only Ji-Hae had been with him.

“The other with me.”, Aimur said.

“Ah, the sound was for your ears only. Don’t you feel special now?” Salar said mockingly, a smirk developing across his jawline.

“The light…”

“That”, interrupted Salar, “required a bit of evocation from our other friend here.” Salar gestured to the person on the left. From their build and height, even in the dark they clearly were not khemakh. Human, Aimur guessed.

“I must say, it was quite fun to watch them work. Wish I had talents like theirs. It would make my work much easier.”

“Now that you have me,” said aimur, the animosity clear in his tone. “What do you intend to do with me? Ransom me to Golma?”

“I am not after coin. Though I will relieve you of yours, you will not be using it.”

“Then wha..”

“I am going to put you on display.”

Aimur felt his throat go dry. Any confusion as to what Salar meant disappeared with the laugh that followed from them. He tried quickly to think of some way out. His arms tensed as he desperately tried to break through the ropes binding him.

“Those are tighter than they look.”

“I can pay you...,” aimur said. His voice betrayed the real panic welling inside him.

“Your corpse is more valuable to me. And with it, the fires it will stoke between the dhoshur and the rest of the dhoshen. You people are like a powder keg. All you need is a little help and it will all blow up.” Salar then drew a knife. It glinted in the dim light.

“Please, I..,” began Aimur but Salar moved and Aimur felt the shock of pain along his throat and the wet feeling as blood began to flow freely. He tried to say something more but it was no use. He could only wait the last few moments in pain as the darkness grew once again. This time, he would not awake to the light.

The next day Aimur’s body was found alongside a couple of dhoshen bodies. It appeared a fight had broken out and the dhoshen had managed to kill the dhoshur officer. Several more fights broke out across dhorvatai as the dhoshur responded, and then the dhoshen answered again. Panic gripped the streets and Dhorvatai became a battlefield.

Elvhenen, Eskeland, and Aurogiena

Refuge: Part I

Copost with Eskeland

Helsingstad-Ryogangsai Road, Border Gate

The moon above draped everything in a faint blue tinge against the darkness of the earth, combated by large stone torches laid in a row alongside each edge of the road usually taken, and beaten, by merchants and common voyagers.

Above and demarcating the crossing point from Eskeland into Ryeongse was a massive concrete, stone brick, and wooden gate, massive pillars around which slithered Uyutahn-style dragons and danced Ryeongsean phoenixes, molded in black iron. Black tiles neatly draped off four corners at the top of the gate. At the side of each gargantuan pillar were walls running north and south, two main substructures of the gate which themselves were host to smaller arrays of walls and fortifications making a fortress. A clearing encircled by these smaller walls stuck to each side of each main wall, the four in total making for accessible resting as well as exit points for cavalrymen, in their duty to patrol ever-busy Ryeongsean-Eskelian traffic. Trade was good and bustling between the two kingdoms; thus, bandits always roamed about. Thus, such defenses were not only warranted but welcomed as well. At least, by Ryeongsean traders to and from Eskeland.

Thankfully, the night was quiet. No bandits roamed anywhere near the road from that crossing point to Ryogangsai itself. The decree of Byeolsan ensured it. Any bandit found was preemptively detained. The night would have to be quiet. Lest an international incident arise.

Hasanajin cavalrymen patrolled the roads from near and afar, relaying across plotted points to ensure the security of the road at this particular time. More infantrymen than usual manned the border fortress gate. Bows and arquebuses stood at the ready from the ground as well as above behind wall-top battlements.

Directly underneath the gate, between two ever-ajar wooden giants of doors, was Naehwa, donning her consular armor, golden scales and studs set against a red and black outer coat, with fur at every hem. Past her sleeves, which stopped at her elbows, were golden bracers fit only for the highest-ranked officials, and a blue embroidered sash was tied around her waist, serving as the base of her belt from which her bow, quiver, and scabbard hung. A keepsake from her niece. Her black boots levered up and down at her mount’s stirrups, the only outlet of her impatience in her otherwise calm demeanor. She wore no helmet, letting her short charcoal hair flow in the night’s wind.

At her sides were Geomnaeajin cavalrymen as well as mounted Hyeongshinjo mages and Cheonyanten guardsmen. Volunteers and cadets from Ryogangsai and its surrounding villages scrambled about the fortress’ insides and darted to and from the mounted welcoming party for last-minute changes, adjustments, and errands.

Naehwa could see the dim lights from Helsingstad’s sprawl even from where she was, in Ryeongsean territory, beyond the approaching Eskelian carriage to which most eyes were glued. The placidity of the villages and, beyond that, the city hid turmoil that apparently was shaking Eskeland at its core. Why else would the royal family come to Ryeongse in exile?

The Council of Regents of Eskeland led by the Marquis of Skarhamn, Stefan, had, days after the death of the king, met to decide about the future of the throne and the country. There were fears in the council that if Ludvig, the son of the king, inherited, he would meet the same fate as his father. The thought differed amongst its members, many called it paranoia, but that didn’t stop them from suggesting to exile him and the rest of the royal family to another country. They spent hours discussing and debating about it. Why? Where? Who would inherit? Is it really necessary? All questions posed during the whole meeting. The opinion was split, but eventually the majority agreed to it after some hard convincing. Stefan and a few others were not satisfied with the conclusion, but they had to abide by it since the majority voted in favour of the exile. All of this happened without the knowledge of Ludvig and the rest of the royal family, who were more than angry after hearing about it the next day, but they, like Stefan, had to agree to the terms.

Weeks later, after everything was packed, they had then left towards their destination, Ryeongse. They had agreed to accept them in, after they were sent a letter by the council. Ludvig at least was pleased that it wasn’t somewhere more far away, but leaving everything he had previously known for a new unknown adventure of sorts, left him and his sister, with feelings of sadness and excitement at the same time.

As the carriage kept getting closer, the Ryeongseans could make out who accompanied them. Escorting the carriage were members of the Königsgarde, clad in their full steel plate armour with a black and gold cloth skirt and their iconic black and red plume feathers at the top of their helmet, underneath the armour a red tunic with golden embroidery and separated black sleeves. Knights of the Hakkapeliitta in the front and back. And finally, leading them was what seemed to be the captain of the company, sporting a long white tunic on top of a semi plate mail and a fur cap.

The carriage came to a stop at the gates. The captain of the company could be heard screaming something in skeljaner, “Kompani, Halt!” and raising his hand in a fist to indicate to the soldiers and the carriage to stop. The captain rode forward to speak with the guard. Once clear, the guards allowed them to continue in. Lynn, Ludvig’s sister, was astounded by the Ryeongsean architecture; she had no idea something like that was at the border the whole time. Ludvig on the other hand was sleeping. It had been a long voyage and he certainly had inherited a thing or two from his father. Raewyn was with them too, but she hadn’t spoken the whole time, still hung on the death of her husband.

Inside the fort, the carriage came to its final stop, finally waking Ludvig up. The Ryeongsean delegation were already in position to greet the royal family. The captain unmounted his horse, while the Hakkapeliitta and the Königsgarde lined up, to accompany the royal family, but with them was also another person. Stefan, who came all the way with them to say a final goodbye, for who knows how long, to the family.

Naehwa and her men met the dismounting Eskelian troops as she and the Cheonyanten also dismounted in a unison thud upon the road, while the Geomnaeajin Cavalry and Hyeongshinjo remained on their mounts. The Ryeongsean consul approached the Eskelians, her men behind her in two uniform rows. She bowed fully at her waist at the Eskelian royals and their entourage. “Welcome to the Won Kingdom of Ryeongse, Esteemed Graces,” she welcomed formally in Kostuan. “My name is So Naehwa, head of His Majesty’s advisory body, and it is my honor to greet you. My only regret is doing so under less fortunate circumstances.”

Ludvig was the first one to come out of the carriage. A tall, long blonde haired person, dressed in the finest clothing just like the rest of the family. The difference in height was evident as it was known that the Eskelians were one of the tallest people in all of Sokos. He bowed and scraped, then greeted her, “The honour is ours too, I am Ludvig, this is my sister Lynn, my mother Raewyn and Duke Stefan. The situation is indeed quite unfortunate but we thank you all the same for agreeing to take us in.”

“Speaking of which,” Naehwa gave a stern look to the Eskelian delegation. They were indeed quite tall, even if Naehwa was large by Ryeongsean standards herself. “We must make haste to Byeolsan. It is the safest place for you in the entire kingdom, and we must not meander there, either. Make whatever arrangements and goodbyes you plan to make now.” Naehwa turned around and called to her men, which summoned staff inside the fortress. The gates of one of the substructures opened, revealing a quite sizable and comfortable palanquin carried by dsen bearers in fine white silk. The bearers knelt before the Eskelians, lowering the palanquin for boarding. “If members of your party are returning to Eskeland, we have transportation available,” Naehwa added.

“How very exotic!” Exclaimed Lynn.

“Yes… exotic indeed sister.” Said Ludvig chuckling at Lynn’s remark, “We must thank you for this Lady Naehwa and worry not, it won’t be necessary to provide transport back to Eskeland, Stefan will return in the carriage we came in. Oh and yes let us indeed make haste towards Byeolsan.” Despite what appearances showed, Ludvig wasn’t happy. He wished to stay back home ruling like he was meant to do.

Everyone got in position for a small goodbye ceremony as it was tradition in Eskeland for any person of fame who was leaving the country for a time. The Königsgarde lined up leading to the royal family, with their zweihanders they began slowly tapping the ground. The Hakkapeliitta behind them, making their horses tap the ground with their hooves. Stefan made his way to the royal family. He stopped in front of them, kneeled and lowered his head then stood back up again, “May Sindri keep you safe during your voyage to Byeolsan and may Kara keep you from any harm during your stay there. Here, a gift from the kingdom to you.” Lynn took the small coffer and opened it to reveal three rings each with an engraving of the royal lion.

“Thank you Stefan, you have carried out your duties in the best of manners, but now we task you with keeping the country safe until the arrival of Prince Theodor.” Stefan nodded, bowed, then stepped back to allow them to mount on the palanquin. A small detachment of the Königsgarde led by the captain lined up behind the palanquin, ready to depart with them, while Stefan mounted the carriage to head back to Tidahamn.

“I hope you don’t mind Lady Naehwa if we take a few soldiers with us.” Said Ludvig

“No problem at all, provided they adhere to our requests. We shall make arrangements to lodge them as well,” Naehwa answered. The Eskelians’ farewells were touching. As chaotic as Sokosian politics did get, no family should have to undergo exile in such a circumstance. Still, Naehwa was a bit taken aback at the “exoticism” of the palanquin. How “exotic” could direct neighbors be? And what did “exoticism” imply?

Naehwa chased the discourse away. She nodded to the Eskelians and turned to mount her steed, as did the rest of the Ryeongsean entourage. “Let us depart, if you are ready,” she announced. Nearby fortress attendants swung open the lacquered palanquin doors for the Eskelian royal family. “We must not dawdle.” She then nodded to the fortress hands, who subsequently disappeared into the complex. They shortly reemerged with a few horses. “For your guards,” Naehwa explained nonchalantly. “What hosts would we be to refuse means of reliable transport for your guards as well?”

“Thank you Lady Naehwa, the generosity of the Ryeongseans truly knows no boundaries. We are ready, let us depart.” Said Ludvig. The captain of the guard took his sword out and made some movements with it to indicate to his soldiers to mount the horses and begin moving when the palanquin departed. Once everything was set, they departed towards Byeolsan. For the first time, probably, in the history of both countries, Eskelian and Ryeongsean soldiers would travel alongside each other.

Naehwa sighed against the brisk night’s air as she rode ahead of the pack, leading the party to Byeolsan, hundreds of horsepaces from the border gate. Regardless of how much progress the entourage made, it would still take days to reach the palace. And then what? Surely there was some sort of divine purpose ordained by the heavenly pantheon. Either for Ryeongse’s gain, Eskeland’s gain, or both. She whipped at the reins of her steed, accelerating it and the party. Whatever was in store would be sooner revealed the sooner they arrived.

{{==========}}

Byeolsan, Inner District, Royal Palace, Front Gate

A series of gong and drum clashes signaled the end of an arduous two weeks’ journey as well as the Ryeongsean-Eskelian party’s arrival. The instruments’ sounds, like the dawn’s sunshine, beamed down upon the entourage from atop the tall, imposing outer palace walls, a sprawling vermillion monolith atop a wide, sturdy base of stone. Along this base were lined a row alternating between banner staffs, on which flew the dynasty’s phoenix against a scarlet background, and Cheonyanten guardsmen, standing resolutely like statues, a polearm in each’s hand.

Naehwa dismounted, as did the Ryeongsean and Eskelian soldiers. The dsen bearers knelt, lowering the palanquin. One opened the palanquin’s doors, signaling for the royal family to exit for their audience with the king of Ryeongse. Court attendants outside led the party’s horses to stables elsewhere.

The colossal, mahogany pine gate, lacquered to perfection and adorned with golden images of dragons, phoenixes, and horses, swung open, at a crawling pace and with a deep, resonant groan. The opening doors revealed the length of the courtyard, a sea of stone tiles surrounded by more vermillion walls leading to the central throne room. A line of more Cheonyanten guardsmen streamed down the courtyard’s length, from the throne room to the gate where the party was, forming two rows gesturing the party’s straight route.

“If you would,” Naehwa turned to face the Eskelians, “per standard courtroom protocol, your men must stay outside, not to enter the throne room. However, our guards are more than capable enough to ensure the safety of the entire complex. If you should choose, we can arrange for the guards to be lodged first next to your manor, and you can reunite following your audience with His Majesty.”

“It won’t be necessary Lady Naehwa, they can wait outside, we would also prefer if they could be lodged with us, for personal reasons more than anything” Said Ludvig.

Naehwa nodded, noting the request. “Then follow me, please.” The consul then turned towards the throne room, leading the Eskelians down the courtyard, past guardsman after guardsman, almost as if crossing a lengthy bridge across this sea of stone. The group came to the stairs leading up to the throne room, raised above the courtyard. Naehwa stopped the group before another set of huge wooden doors, this time leading to the throne room. It was a large complex in the midst of the walled maze called the Royal Palace, a monolith of scarlet with pillars of gold and black lacquered wood about it, holding up a massive tiled roof blanketing the entire structure with black stone and white and golden highlights. A dragon was set on each corner, as if judging the palace grounds in heavenly justice. “To debrief you on court etiquette in Ryeongse,” Naehwa whispered to the Eskelians, with a serious face, “enter the throne room once you are introduced and stop halfway to the throne. Then, you are to fully bow preferably at the waist in Ryeongsean fashion or may perform equivalent acts of reverence as you would your own king, may Bulhwasa kindle his soul in his next jubilant life. Stay bowing until His Majesty excuses you. Stay silent until His Majesty speaks to you.” Guests from another royal family as they were, they would still give His Majesty his due respect as any other Ryeongsean citizen would, if Naehwa could do anything about it.

The massive doors before them opened with a resounding creak. From inside the building, a palace attendant announced in Gogwihan-eo, “Of the Daemyundan So Clan, So Naehwa, Chief Consul to His Majesty!” Naehwa entered first, leaving the Eskelian delegation behind. She came halfway to the throne and knelt fully, bowing as well. Upon seeing His Majesty’s hand excusing her, Naehwa stood, bowing at her waist again before going the rest of the way.

The court attendant then announced, “Of House av Varberg, the Royal Family of Eskeland, Queen Raewyn av Varberg, Prince Ludvig av Varberg, and Princess Lynn av Varberg, in audience with His Majesty of the Won Dynasty of Ryeongse Won Jangyeon!”

Ludvig, Lynn and Raewyn proceed to enter the throne room, following Naehwa. Ludvig compared to Lynn wasn’t nervous at all of meeting the king and queen of Ryeongse; years of dealing with nobles taught him not to be nervous in front of anyone. Raewyn on the other side who hadn’t said one word since leaving Tidahamn, had more experience with dealing with other nobles, she was once the queen of Eskleand after all.

Upon entering they were greeted by the impressive sights of the throne room. Spacious and airy, the throne room seemed perpetually dark yet lit at all corners at the same time. Dark red and black walls against which were spaced paper windows with golden frames surrounded the pool of black tiled marble that made up the floor, reflecting everything above just like a still moonlit pond. The ceiling, on which painted figures of the god-king Wonjungmu, the Ryeong Horde uniter Ju Wonmyeopgum, and the Ryeongsean phoenix and horse swirled about in vivid colors, was held up by mighty polished stone pillars, with golden images and patterns hugging these as well. In parallel with the pillars leading to the throne were lines of Cheonyanten guardsmen, Hyeongshinjo mages, court attendants, scribes, and bureaucrats. At the foot of the raised throne platform sat on polished seats of their own the advisory body of the King. The Eskelians saw Naehwa at the center of this arrangement; she studied the Eskelians with narrowed eyes, likely to see how observant of the Ryeongsean court procedures Naehwa described they were.

At the top of the platform itself were two thrones, of polished wood and set with golden images and patterns. On the larger of the two was the king, adorned in a deep red hanbok robe base on which sat plate and lamellar armor of traditional Ryeong Horde design. Pauldrons of such lamellar design draped down past his shoulders, continued, in a sense, by golden bracers from the elbow down. He wore a glossy black helmet, set with a phoenix wing sweeping up and back from above each of his ears and stemming from a golden patterned band around the helmet. The helmet tapered up to a conical point, at the top of which a dragon’s head pointing skywards sported a mane that was his white-as-snow tassel.

Next to him on the smaller of the two thrones was the queen. Wearing a midnight-purple hanbok with silver patterns, she also wore ceremonial armor, of Hyeongshinjo design covering her torso and arms in intermittent clusters of lamellar and plate armor in gold as well. She wore a hairpin tiara on her elegantly arranged hair, braids arranged in a central swirl like distant galaxies above, only reinforced with more jewel pins like stars in the night sky of her hair. Her face as smooth and refined as silk bore traditional rouge dots on her cheeks and forehead, the same shade on her lips as well. Still, a scar raced up her neck from beyond her white, neatly folded collar. It sprouted like a sickly white tree onto the left side of her face, a hideous mark on an otherwise resplendent woman.

Lynn and Raewyn flawlessly executed the proper etiquette as described by Naewha, Ludvig too, except that he wasn’t able to properly perform the full bow to the waist, instead deciding to do one in the Eskelian way which was an equivalent. They might be royals, but they were not in power anymore, nor had they any lands, rendering them minor nobles back home. This meant they had basically, by Eskelian law, no right to act as if they were an equivalent to a king or queen. They had to abide by what Naewha told them. They remained that way until the king excused them and finally allowed them to face him and speak with him.

King Jangyeon waved his hand, excusing the Eskelians from their bow. “Welcome to the Kingdom of Ryeongse,” he smiled warmly in Kostuan. “Circumstances aside, we will be your most honored hosts in our most beautiful nation in the hopes that you will come to truly cherish Ryeongse as your own.” Queen Shirin echoed her husband’s smile, staying silent.

Ludvig gave a small step forward as representative of the group to thank them, “Thank you very much your majesty, and another thank you for allowing us to take refuge in your beautiful country, I and my sister have enjoyed every bit of the ride from the frontier to Byeolsan, taking in the beautiful scenery and we will make sure to make the most of our stay here” He said bowing once more in form of thanks, “Of course we do not wish to take advantage of such generosity Your Majesty, if you need any anything from us just say the word and we will come, be it from royal matters to the most minimal of things like a small musical performance, ever heard of the nyckelharpa? I believe it is only fair that we repay you in some way.”

“Please,” Jangyeon shook his head. “Where would Ryeongse’s honor be if it took payment for offering refuge to a fleeing family, let alone one of royal status? There is no need to repay what we have offered. However, with this agreement also comes participation in Ryeongsean structures, specifically for Your Graces the Prince and Princess. Of course, nothing obligates you from partaking in this, but partaking in the country’s rigorous academic and bureaucratic programs will guarantee an increase in your stipend while you are here.”

Naehwa added from her seat, “Although you will be given lodging and food free of charge, a small stipend will be regularly sent to your manor to provide a stream of income for other needs and wants. However, boosting such a stipend through active service in the nation’s military, academics, or political structure will allow your family to enjoy a more comfortable disposable income.”

“I implore you not to misunderstand. The difference is quite subtle but crucial,” Jangyeon continued from where Naehwa left off. “This is not paying back whatever debt you think you have accrued by coming here. Rather, this is an opportunity not only to resume your royal studies as you would have in Eskeland but also to honor Ryeongse itself by engaging in it.” Jangyeon picked up a nearby scroll, perusing its contents concerning the Eskelians. “You are free to roam the entire kingdom with your Eskelian escort and with Ryeongsean road escorts between cities as well as city guards within them. However, be aware of whatever responsibilities you hold, including those to yourselves. Your only free lodging will be in Byeolsan’s Inner District, so I do request that you mostly keep within the city’s limits. Furthermore, even if the Prince and Princess choose to engage in Ryeongse’s military, politics, or academia, your schedule is up to you to construct. Think of this entire kingdom as another institution for higher learning. Please exercise ambition with careful planning and responsibility.”

“As for Your Grace the Lady av Varberg,” Naehwa brought up, “His Majesty and his courtly audience have inferred that you have not a large responsibility or expectancy to learning or civil service, so you may do as you wish. Byeolsan’s services should allow you to comfortably rest in your manor, although you are by no means confined there.”

Raewyn, not having said a word after leaving Tidaham, came forward to speak, “Thank you very much, my son and daughter will surely appreciate such an opportunity I am sure and I certainly expect them to do it.” She said looking at them both with a serious look, “However as for me, I am not planning to remain for long here.”

“Of course mother, I shall take full advantage of this opportunity, I know this will be good for me, I will finally be able to learn more of Ryeongse from close, however I do not understand why you must leave so soon and where are you even planning to go?” Said Lynn.

Raewyn took some time to think before finally answering, “I do not know dear, somewhere, we will speak of this another day.”

“I do not mean to sound rude with what I am about to say, but I would like if we were escorted to our new residence, the voyage was tiring to say the least, but I would certainly love to come back tomorrow if permitted to continue discussing this, Like my sister, I am sure this might benefit me too and not to say that one can’t let such an opportunity pass by.” Said Ludvig

“Of course,” Jangyeon responded with an understanding smile. “I did not mean to keep you from rest, and this discussion can always be refined as you spend your days here. You may take your leave with my dismissal from this court I now give.” He stood and bowed, with Shirin and the advisory body following suit. “May you find joyous and prosperous days in Ryeongse, but may your return to your homeland be peaceful and swift.”

“I hope on behalf of this court that you can find good usage out of your time here,” Naehwa echoed the king’s sentiments. “As you leave, a detachment of the royal guard will escort you to your manor. It is only a short walk from the palace, and although you must be under guard as you do so, such a chore will only be endured for a few minutes.” She bowed. “Rest well.”

Ludvig, Lynn and Raeweyn bowed in thanks before departing for their new residence. The detachment of the royal guard helped them to the residence, the Königsgarde also following them with the royal guard. After walking past a few blocks of houses they finally arrived at their residence.

Although shamed by the towering walls and roofs of the palace they took in just prior, this manor was by no means humble either. A white wall atop a cobblestone foundation raced along the outer edge of the premise, demarcating this piece of land to the av Varbergs. It was a rather large estate as well, the land dedicated to this particular manor among the largest in Byeolsan, relative to other noble residences. In the middle of the estate, set between lush gardens and rows of vegetables and pine trees was assembled a vast array of single-storied hanok subcomplexes, sturdy white walls with dark pine spaced intervallically against them with plenty of windows and doors. Separate buildings, either built in rectangular prisms or as elbow boxes spaced around a central square courtyard, were for different purposes, including kitchens, pantries, living rooms, recreational rooms, libraries, lounges, studies, offices, and bedrooms. All were topped with cloud-grey roof tiles, beating back the sun in intense summers while also absorbing what heat it could in harsh winters. Each building was raised above its stone foundation with wooden pillars to allow air to rush through the bottom in accordance with Byeolsan’s warmer temperate climate, as opposed to models in the north, which lacked this feature.

Satisfied that the av Varbergs arrived safely, the Cheonyanten escort bowed in farewell and departed back to the palace, leaving the Eskelian royal family and their guard to themselves.

“I wasn’t expecting this, that is for sure. What do you think, sister?” Said Ludvig.

“I love it! Look how big it is, it would certainly put to shame many of the mansion back home, this could fit an entire battalion.” Said Lynn.

“You can say that again, it certainly is impressive. Captain.” Ludvig turned to the captain,“ take the soldiers in, accommodate them in those buildings over there, convert them into barracks and you know what to do.” Ludvig sighed, “Well, here is to a new life, let us hope this one is less…Chaotic.”

Elvhenen, Eskeland, and Straulechen

East and West, North and South

Tscynyasi, Imperial Kingdom of Uyuti, Tong Empire

The Imperial Throne, the center of the Imperial Palace and of the Tong Empire, was a great room. Massive in scale and capacity, and on many of a day, it would be packed with hundreds. The Emperor, his guards, Imperial nobility both native and from abroad, their guards, his many advisors and officials, and audience and petitioners alike. But today, it was a scant few.

Only a handful were in the room; the Emperor, Tong Jong-Yai, upon his throne and six guards, three to each side. The Imperial Marshal Hongzhong-Din stood immediately to his right hand side, and to the Marshal’s side were his three underlings, General-of-the-North Po-Zho, General-of-the-South Yong-Nai, and Admiral Swo-Nong. To the Emperor’s left stood the Grand Imperial Minister Yu-Qi, flanked only by a handful of lower ministers.

Standing before the Emperor were three new faces, all dressed in the armor of warriors of the Empire, each kneeling to honor the Emperor.

“Today, is a glorious day, but a solemn one as a precursor of what is to come. Today, we consecrate the beginning of new forces, of grand new armies to do great things. Today we elevate those who have served well to positions of great new heights, and to create things that are wonderous. Stepped forward Gon Yu-Lyo.” Emperor Jong-Yai said, his words loud and clear, echoing through enormous room.

Gon Yu-Lyo, the first of those kneeling before the Emperor, stood up. Walking forward toward Jong-Yai, his head bowed in respect to his sovereign.

“Gon Yu-Lyo, you have served honorably in the army of this Empire for many years; you show courage and cunning, and above all else loyalty to the state and to me. You have served well and it has shown, and thus, at the recommendation of Marshal Hongzhong-Din, you are elevated to the position of General-of-the-West; a new title and position, granted to you in your honor.” Jong-Yai said.

Jong-Yai gestured to the Marshal, who stepped forward to meet the newly made general. Hongzhong-Din presented a sword, a fine flamberge with the crossguard and handle that a of Uyutahn Dragon gilded in gold and pearls, and held it out in front of Yu-Lyo.

“I present this weapon as a symbol of your station, a weapon of authority, power, and prestige. Use it honorably, for your Emperor and your Empire.” The Marshal stated as Yu-Lyo picked up the sword and bowed.
General Yu-Lyo then moved to be behind the Marshal, standing next to the other Generals and Admiral.

“Fong Ji-Ong, step forward.” Jong-Yai said.

The next of the warriors kneeling stood, and walked forward, copying all the stepped and positions that Yu-Lyo had done. Making sure to be respectful at all times.

“Fong Ji-Ong, much like myself, you have served as both a monk and a soldier; your magic is mighty, and your mind is sharp and precise. Your tactics have proven to be the decisive factor to all the engagements you have ever commanded. You come highly recommended by both my ministers and my generals, and with your loyalty proven in Dhorvas, I elevate you to the position of General-of-the-East. Bear this new title with honor and nobility.” Jong-Yai said.

Ji-Ong stepped forward, like Yu-Lyo before him, and the Marshal presented an identical sword to the new General. And having taken it, Ji-Ong moved to beside Yu-Lyo and the others.

“Am Li-Syo, step forward.”

The final warrior arose and moved into the position before the Emperor.

“Am Li-Syo, you were once a humble fisherman, and then a merchant, and then a fine captain. You have served in the campaigns of the West with most great patience and are well liked by all the men you have ever commanded. The ships you have directed have performed with utmost efficiency, and thus by the recommendation of Admiral Swo-Nong, I grant you the title of Admiral-of-the-Black Fleet. Enjoy your title, but be humble and obedient, as Swo-Nong is now the Admiral-of-the-White Fleet.” Jong-Yai said.

Li-Syo stepped forward and received the final sword of the lot, identical to the first two.

“And with this, we have created not only two new generals and an admiral as well, but two new armies and a fleet to be commanded by them. Let us rejoice, both at their achievements, but also at the future they will bring us. A day when we guide all to a new future.” Jong-Yai said, “Let us the guide the universe to our way.”

Elvhenen, Namalar, Ryeongse, Eskeland, and 1 otherStraulechen

Aurogiena

Creation

Founding Post

Aurogiena, La Reggia, Central Kitchen

A shower of snowy white threw itself upon the earthy battlefield on which it found itself. It was a primer, of sorts, of a conflict, as Giasone could put it. One won by hands, won by patience, won by skill. And yet there was an art about it, a humility in its extravagant effort. Giasone sighed in anticipation. This was only the start.

A mound of flour sat atop the weathered tabletop, like a snowy mountain to be conquered by Giasone. It was time to begin.

Giasone rolled up his sleeves, of a crude tunic yet one that was comfortable and convenient for messy kitchen jobs such as these. He dashed his hand into a bowl of large salt crystals nearby. Despite his age, his pinch kept steady as it carried its loot from the bowl to the mound of flour. With his other hand, Giasone made a well in the mountain, turning it into a volcano. He released, scattering the salt in the cleared center.

Grabbing a bowl of eggs, Giasone took egg by egg in his hands, breaking them with the skill and practice of decades, alternating between each hand in lightning succession. It wasn’t the most traditional recipe, in all senses Aurogienese, but he developed a liking for Seranitian styles of pasta. Giasone always had a soft spot for eggs. As the lava of the eggs began to rise higher and higher against the surrounding wall of flour, Giasone reached for a golden fork. He then plunged it into the eggs, liquifying this lava and immersing a bit of flour with each whisk. Whisking and whisking, clumps of flour would fall into this vortex of egg as two separate elements slowly became one, as the dough began to form and incorporate.

With the dough sufficiently formed, Giasone placed the fork nearby and began to scoop at the edges, bringing the flour together and fully bringing to form and unity this unruly ball of sticky dough. Giasone then scattered some more flour from the sack at his feet across the workspace, keeping the pasta from sticking as he turned it around and plopped it atop the flour. He grabbed it firmly and started kneading, pushing his aged palm downwards onto the pasta over and over again. Bit by bit, the sticky resistor would succumb to development, becoming tougher and smoother, more elastic and compliant with his hand. Giasone knew the feeling well, and not just in making pasta. Kneading dough was preferable to him to kneading people. Flour does not breathe as people do. All doughs eventually become ready through enough kneading, a guarantee juxtaposed against the ironic constant of unruliness and chaos of people, no matter how much one kneads, through guidance, reward, or punishment. Perhaps this factored into the kitchen being practically empty whenever Giasone cooked for the royal family. Just as he liked it. Not even his own children were allowed to intervene in this craft of obsession of his. Not even the vast emptiness of the kitchen, its high-rising walls spaced apart with beautifully carved arches and pillars, its painted ceilings of Zekerianist mythos and doctrinal figures, could make Giasone feel lonely. Such a feeling was irrelevant whenever he cooked. He was a guide, a creator like The Greatest himself shaping primeval elements like flour, salt, and eggs, into something coherent, something as a work in progress to be further shaped to perfection.

The dough reached perfect consistency and texture by this point. Giasone took the now-tacky and workable ball into a bowl, putting a cloth over it to rest on another counter as he contended with the mozzarella. He lumbered with a large steel pot, putting it above a barely simmering stove and also bringing with an awkward waddle jugs of water buffalo milk to be poured into the pot. Needless to say, squeezing a bit of lemon juice into the pot afterward by comparison was a welcome next step. Stirring intermittently with a wooden spoon, Giasone dipped his finger in the pot in intervals, judging the temperature of the milk through years of experience. In fact, he had often been reprimanded by his father for neglecting his studies in favor of perfecting the art of mozzarella-making, a task which still made him palpitate with uncertainty. The first stage. Giasone’s finger directed him to the next step: pouring in a bit of rennet mixed with water to coagulate the milk into curds. He removed the pot off the stove, with cloth at each metal handle, and placed a lid over the pot, waiting for the milk to curdle. He remembered vividly a day when he had forgotten to heed the pot’s heat. His hands burnt pink certainly raised the concern of the lady he was courting and almost cost him his future with her. Fortunately, the cheese made that day convinced her otherwise.

After a few minutes, grabbing a long, thin knife (Giasone found Qirinii models among the most impressive for this task), Giasone ran it through the now-solid milk, cutting in a grid to separate the solid surface into cubes. With the wooden spoon, he stirred cautiously as he moved the pot back (again, with cloth to protect his hands) over the heat. Another period of raising the heat, measured over a period of quite literally testing the waters (or whey, in this instance). The moment once again. Giasone removed the pot from the heat once more, continuing to stir for a few more minutes as the curds began to soften. The latest step in this arduous process, all the more made worth it with the end result. Could he say the same thing about his childhood, how the arduous tasks forced upon him would all be “for the better?” Constant pressure and heat, slowly forming into the ideal son, the ideal man? He certainly felt as if his emotions and memories coagulated into something new. What it was, what he became, he had yet to see. And it wasn’t just him at stake if he turned out to be something else. Something worse. His family. And beyond the palace grounds as well.

Giasone breathed. In and out. Just like with making cheese, all Giasone could do was his best. No one could ask for anything more or less, and it would thus be good enough.

The curds began to soften, allowing Giasone to proceed to the next stage. He grabbed a mesh spoon, scooping the curds from the pot into the sink, in which a large mesh strainer sat underneath a bowl. After spraying the curds with a pinch of special cheese salt, he dove into the cheese with both hands, bare and exposed without coverage against the still-scalding residual heat of the curds. Giasone tossed and lifted against the sieve, straining the whey from the curds and leaving only what was desired. Just like what Father tried to do against Giasone. Straining his love for cooking, his passion for art, his desire for sculpting. As the curds were effectively squeezed out of most of the whey, Giasone recombined the whey from the bowl in the sink with the whey still in the pot over the stove. Bringing it back over the flame, Giasone stirred and waited for the whey mixture to come to tea brewing temperature. All set, Giasone scooped up a clump of the curds and dipped them, hands and all, into the scalding water. Giasone often lashed out against Father in heated fashion. Yet just as Giasone’s hands were completely adapted, numb even, against the heat of the whey, Father cared little for Giasone’s chagrin. Just as Giasone kept stretching and folding the cheese to its final form regardless of the whey’s heat, dipping it into the whey as necessary, Father kept persevering against Giasone. Even to his deathbed.

With one ball formed, Giasone grabbed some ice in one of the many pantries in the kitchen (this particular one was regularly replenished by palace mages) and combined the ice with some water, a bit of whey, and some salt. After giving it a quick mix, Giasone dropped the finished ball of mozzarella into the bowl as he worked on the rest of the balls. A distance from the ever-present hands of the chef, the shaper, to attain its final form. As painful as Father’s death was, the time to himself that Giasone suddenly found himself with allowed him to think, to breathe, to apply what he had learned (what had been forced upon him) with freedom. There was a sort of blessing to that, in a sense.

Two. Three. Four. Giasone wiped his brow. He then took a pinch of one of the cheese balls and plopped it into his mouth, around which ran traces of silver hair and leathery wrinkles. Giasone always tasted his cheese at that moment. There were moments when the cheese would be so unbearably awful that he would throw out the entire finished batch and start over. There were other moments, such as just now, that made the effort worth it. It was delicious. The subtle, somewhat sourness cut back a bit with the salt was light and fresh, as if the process of curding, straining, and forming brought a sort of freedom to the cheese from its water buffalo milk form. Not as strong as something like Windstaati cheese, but its strength lay not in its flavor but its melting texture, at least in this application (although Caprese salads do bring out the strengths of raw mozzarella in its own way).

And so the mozzarella would be deemed finished. And not a moment too soon; the dough was ready to be shaped into sheets of lasagna.

The dough’s texture had significantly improved while Giasone was making the cheese. Perhaps there was too much improvement; Giasone feared that the mozzarella taking so long compromised the dough. However, upon knifing a part of it and rolling it out on the previously-floured workspace so that the evening light from the stained glass of the palace was able to just barely penetrate the sheet, it was sufficient enough. As such, Giasone continued with the rest, converting the ball of dough into lasagne and hanging them on racks. All dough had to be converted somehow if it is to be made into pasta. A single, hysterical lump of pasta dough would make for a horrible dish, if not rendered downright impossible at the endeavor’s start. No, pasta needed to be rolled, transformed, pieced apart to become workable, to enter the water, the sauce, and then the mouth in beautiful succession. Just like dividing and conquering opposing armies. Father was always able to get more out of Giasone whenever he analogized the art of war to the art of cooking.

On a cutting board, Giasone slapped down carrots, celery stalks, onions, and a nice cut of pancetta. Giasone preferred to use his connections to procure the rarest and best kinds of meat. He had under his supervision pigs hybridized and bred en masse from Serulean, Eskelian, Syrdurian, and endemic Aurogienese stocks. From cured meats to the pancetta to raw cuts like high-grade loin Giasone also grabbed for tonight’s dish, these pigs, to Giasone’s knowledge, were picked from among the best in the continent to represent the best in the continent. Beasts of perfection, in other words.

With another knife, of highest-quality Volgar make, Giasone took the onions and chopped at either end and scraped at the carrot’s bark, peeling away each vegetable’s skins. Once finished, Giasone took the three vegetables and diced them finely. He set them aside and carved up the pancetta to a similar size. He popped a small, sunset-pink cube in his mouth. As he thought. Perfection. Even raw, the already grassy, herby freshness and refined kick of the fatty, melt-in-your-mouth cut were accentuated with weeks of aging, adding a salty and nutty combination into the already colorful mix of flavors. Giasone found no need to similarly taste the carrots, celery, and onions.

The cutting board cleared once again, Giasone next laid down the loin. He laid his hand down on the silky-smooth silverskin, taking that same knife, after a quick rinse in the sink, and trimming off the excess. Giasone always preferred to do trims and adjustments like these himself. Never, as he kept saying, trust a butcher with the cut of meat that you will end up buying. Once done, Giasone pointed the knife at an angle, running it across the loin and scoring it in a hatch pattern. This allowed a nice Namarian olive oil to penetrate deep in the meat, as well as act as a binder for a nice layer of spiced Empyrial salt and imported Tylosian black pepper. A simple duo along with the springy and spicy yet refined and rich olive oil and the herby fullness of the loin itself.

Giasone took a large iron pan and set it over the stove. Atop some lard and oil, he laid the loin down like a baby in a crib. Soon to grow not into a man but into something edible and deliciously so. As he did, the oil, placid like the morning sea, soon crackled with hot fury, bubbling in tiny explosions around the meat they were frenzying around. Giasone pressed his hand down on the loin. He felt the cold of the meat still slime about his palm and also the stinging bubbles of the lard and oil. He didn’t mind too much, however. Such pain was often necessary to get the crust needed for meat like this. As the loin cooked, the simple yet always alluring smell of pork wafted through the air, making the kitchen come truly alive. Giasone could not help but smile. This is when cooking really started to get interesting. The aromas dancing about the air as prepared materials were called into life, to dance and intermingle around a central purpose of ultimate culinary satisfaction. Art, in other words.

With some large tongs, Giasone flipped the loin, gingerly yet firmly, to the other side. The crust on the first side had formed magnificently. A deep golden brown rockiness about an expanse of brown-grey meat. Nothing burnt or untouched by the kiss of the pan’s searing heat. Magnificent. As the other side cooked, Giasone threw in the pancetta and vegetables, taking the tongs and stirring them around. With the vegetables’ small size, they soon turned soft and fragrant, the newcomer aroma of the calmer vegetables playing wonderfully with the preestablished pork olfactory dominance in the air. As they cooked, Giasone quickly grabbed imported Tylosian tomatoes, acquired at quite the cost. Still, it was worth it. He grabbed a masher and quickly jammed the tomatoes around in a bowl, working them slowly from individual fruits into a singular mass. Tossing a bit of salt, homegrown oregano, pepper, and chili flakes into the tomatoes, Giasone then threw them onto the pan, enveloping the bottom in the soupiness of the tomatoes, including the small, softened bits of cooked vegetables and sauteed pancetta. Only the loin remained as it was, standing like an island above a crimson sea of flavor. Giasone next grabbed a bottle of luxury Almunan wine, splashing a bit onto the tomato sauce and stirring to combine. With this part of cooking would also come the most agonizing bits: waiting. Giasone could wait if nothing much was happening. Dough proofing. Cheese curdling. Potatoes bathing. But when it came to moments like these, where Giasone had to agonizingly wait for a perfectly seared and crusted pork loin in a bubbling sea of tomato and wine sauce with fresh herbs, aromatic vegetables, and cured pancetta, it was akin to torture.

And so Giasone waited.

Giasone would occasionally baste the loin with bubbling pork broth, courtesy of the stovetop as well as handy mages in the palace.

Fortunately, multitasking could chase away the excruciating waiting period. And this time was perfect for making some ricotta. Giasone took some more milk and some heavy cream in another pot over the stove next to the pork, bringing that to a bare simmer. After adding a pinch of salt, he kept stirring, keeping the milk from sticking or burning. At the sign of the first bubbles, Giasone took some of the wood off the stove and poked around, lowering the heat. He splashed in some vinegar, slowly, bit by bit, and then lemon juice. Then, moving the pot to unused space on the stove, with no fire underneath, Giasone continued to stir, allowing the cheese to curdle and cool.

In a bowl with damp cheesecloth, Giasone poured the coagulated milk, bit by bit, into the bowl, leaving it be for dozens of minutes. Giasone bit his lip. Although he had distracted himself from the pork somewhat in making ricotta, now the aroma of ricotta tempted him as well.

Giasone sat on a stool in the kitchen and continued to wait.

Only after a couple of hours did Giasone attempt to measure the readiness of the pork. Taking the tongs, Giasone pressed against the pork. It was still springy but resilient, firm and tenacious. Plus, it smelled even more stellar than before. The olive oil, as well as a bit of that tomato and wine sauce, really worked into the pork to bring its smell to new heights. Giasone took a small piece and ate. The first thing that stuck out to him was that Greatest-blessed tenderness, how even that small bit melted in his mouth. Even though the cut had essentially no fat, the olive oil and lard gave it the richness it needed, and the sauce and stock cooking the loin low-and-slow resulted in a cut that was nurtured to this level of perfection, not brazenly rushed, which would have led to meat tougher than Lopexian leather. And the flavors, oh, the flavors. The richness of the meat cut through with the sweet tartness of the tomatoes and the elegant regality of the wine, strengthened and built upon that foundational comfort of the pork broth, signaled to Giasone that this was another success and that the next part was ready.

Giasone lit the fires of the oven, slowly encouraging it from a small spark into a roaring flame. It would take a while for the palace oven, one of such scale and quality, to heat up, so he had plenty of time for the remaining steps before final assembly.

He returned to the loin, removing it from the pan and placing it on another cutting board. With an ever-sharp Uyutahn cleaver, Giasone began to chop away, using the weight of the slightly cumbersome yet intuitively rocking blade to wither away at the pieces of pork, reducing them to bits. Half he scooped up with the cleaver and tossed into the sauce, incorporating this second meat entrant. He tasted a spoonful. As wonderful as he could ever hope. The richness of the two porks playing off of the wine and the tomatoes… The other half Giasone placed into a bowl, along with the crumbs of some leftover Brelognian bread, grated parmesan, and an egg. After mixing thoroughly with a wooden spoon, Giasone took clumps into his hands, one by one, forming rough and flat yet intuitively shaped wads of meat. In another pan over high heat, Giasone poured a good amount of olive oil and began to fry the meat “balls” to perfect doneness. The seasoning for the meatballs was simple: whatever the loin had plus some more Empyrial salt and pepper. It was foolish to overseason one part of a whole dish, regardless of how important or how perceivably bland each part was. Everything had a part to play in the dish. Father could have learned a thing or two from such wisdom in cooking.

In the same pan, Giasone retrieved Hallish sausages, whose shelf life was coming to an end, and laid them in with the tongs. (Such faraway products often needed to be consumed right after delivery. These sausages arrived two days ago and needed to be eaten today or not at all.) Once done, Giasone retrieved the meat from its casings and cut it into bits with a rather effective Saejin paring knife.

Finally, before assembly, Giasone checked the ricotta. It had strained fully. Giasone dipped his finger and tasted. It was light, slightly tangy, and sweet, yet it had a subtle refreshing fullness to it. As he ran the cheese through his mouth, his tongue met countless little granules in the ricotta curds: soft, not hard. Delicate. Good. Giasone took another egg and broke it into the ricotta, along with some more grated parmesan, salt, and pepper. Giasone always imported his parmesan. Although he could make it himself, there was something about aged, hard, and foreign parmesan, especially from the northern Kostua regions, that bewitched him since he first tried it so many years ago. He took a spoon and mixed the cheese together, ready not to be eaten at that moment, but spread into layers, to become something new.

Giasone took the lasagna sheets from their racks. They had hardened up somewhat from being in there for so long, but a scant few minutes in salted boiling water rendered them workable—and stackable. Giasone took each cooked sheet out of the water once done and dried them thoroughly. He grabbed a large baking tray, greased it with olive oil, and readied it before everything else.

It was time to assemble the lasagne.

First, Giasone laid down the pasta in a layer, overlapping, tucking, and bending to cover the floor of the pan in a blanket of boiled dough. Next came the ricotta. Giasone took spoonful after spoonful and spread it across the dough, the blanket of yellow replaced with a blanket of grainy, smooth white. This blanket soon ran red as the third layer, the meat sauce, was layered on top. Giasone killed the heat underneath the sauce as it began to diminish from its pan and accumulate in the baking tray. Next, the meatballs. Giasone layered and arranged each piece to fit into each other’s jagged and irregular edges, maximizing the amount of meat at any given point in the dish. On top of that came the sausage meat, also arranged to fit within any gaps and bring to every bite the killer flavor of meat. Next came the mozzarella. Giasone took a ball out of its cold water bath and sliced it, arranging them neatly atop the meat. And then repeat. Pasta, ricotta, sauce, meatballs, sausage, mozzarella. Again. And again. When exhausted of all ingredients (a relatively good estimation of ingredient usage, coming from years of practice and immeasurable disappointment in wasting cheese or sauce or meat), Giasone topped the pan with the last bits of sauce, parmesan sprinkles, and mozzarella slices. He topped with a few pinches of dried oregano and basil, took the pan into the roaring oven, and waited some more.

{{==========}}

Aurogiena, La Reggia, Dining Hall

“Dig in, dig in!” Giasone barked with a playful smile to the table: his beautiful wife, his honorable children, his rambunctious grandchildren.

“I should not wish to eat too much, Father, if you understand,” Lecive bashfully frowned. As the middle daughter in the family, she always cared about image and beauty, shown even in her elaborate pearl jewelry against her nightgown.

“Oh, no,” Giasone dismissed. “This was my doing. I went late again. My apologies; I should really know to keep dinner with the sun still up.”

“If that compromises your meals, Father, then do not bother,” Culaud sternly interjected. He rummaged his knife through his rather large portion of lasagna and wolfed a cumbersome fork’s worth down in the blink of an eye. Despite his appetite, Culaud’s physique remained as slim and strong as ever. “This is truly delicious, Father.”

“You say that every time, so I can’t take your advice too seriously,” Giasone scoffed. He turned to his youngest son, Ramurio. “What do you think, my boy?”

Ramurio was barely a man, yet he had all the wisdom in the kingdom, it seemed. He held nothing back against his father, which made him a perfect culinary judge. He always was true to his emotions, and his emotions were always true to fact. Ramurio gingerly carved downwards with his fork a small triangle of the lasagna layers and brought it to his cautiously open mouth. He bit and chewed.

Then Ramurio smiled. “For once, Culaud tells the truth. This truly is amazing.”

Giasone couldn’t keep back his smile. “I’m glad you think so. That you all think so.” Giasone would always keep talking in dinners such as these, which were almost every day. So much so that Giasone often never got a single bite of the masterpiece he spent hours to make, not to mention the time and money spent beforehand to prepare for such ambitious dishes. But seeing his family smile, laugh, and enjoy the food he merely as a father could bring to the table, that was his meal. That was his appetite satiated.

Giasone caught in the corner of his eye the servants about the sky-high dining chamber, attending to the needs of his family while eyeing the lasagna, among the plethora of other entrees and sides. “Please,” Giasone stood, a plate of lasagna, bread, and vegetables in hand, as a servant stopped to pour Giasone some more wine. “Eat with us, all of you.” Giasone turned to face all the servants. “Bring the wine here for all of us to drink. Surely cleaning and other matters can wait until after dinner.”

The servant paused. Giasone’s heart sank a little. It was clear she barely received such kindness, and she had, as far as Giasone knew, served in the palace her entire life. She stole a glance at another servant, whose gaze must have told her to bow reverently and respond, in sincere gratitude, “Thank you, Your Majesty.”

Elvhenen, Syrduria, Eskeland, and Straulechen

Syrduria

Back To Obersrath

Fromaditatius, 344 ATF

A miserable and glum expression crossed Lyrenz’s face as he observed his surroundings. The pitter-patter of the rain fell constantly upon his gleaming armour, as he stood around in the freezing cold. His eyes were droopy and lined by dark circles. His wet blonde hair clung uncomfortably to his face, and his gleaming armour suffered under the torrential downpour just as much as its wearer. He rested his right hand on the pommel of his sword—though occasionally it would start to slip and he would have to readjust its position—and every few seconds or so he would let out a quiet sniffle, and clean his face with his left hand.

The men around him were in similar states, all shivering in the freezing cold. Being in the process of packing up the camp, they had no respite from the awful rains that had not ceased not once in the entire week. Obeying the orders of their superiors, they tore down their tents—the only place of shelter from the weather—and gathered the rest of their things, neatly arranging them on large wagons that in the next day would set off back to Obersrath.

Lyrenz turned his gaze to a group of soldiers who were in the middle of dismantling a great bombard. Dressed in light clothing, and without barely any armour, they shuddered and quivered, as they picked up crates of gunpowder and carted them off to a nearby wagon. The group of 10 or so men were being supervised by a rough looking individual, who wore a fanciful doublet and puffed up hoses. Stroking his large moustache with his hand, he barked out orders left and right, giving the men no time to rest.

“Careful with that, careful!” He shouted, turning to two of the men who were carrying a crate of gunpowder. “You mustn’t let the rain ruin it. Careful with it. Careful…” He continued, observing their handling of the crate with caution. The supervisor let out a hoarse cough, then spat onto the ground, before letting out yet more coughs.

“Iskren almighty…this rain will bloody kill us all.” He remarked to the men, provoking some laughter. Then suddenly one of the men slipped in his movement, and let a barrel of gunpowder drop onto the ground, which rolled along the mud before stopping.

“Bertók! What the hell are you doing with that, Iskren’s sake, let me handle it.” He shouted, picking up the barrel of gunpowder and bringing it over to the wagon. The soldier who had dropped the barrel attempted to get up, but each time his body lost its strength and he fell back down. Raising his hand to his temple, he clutched it tightly, groaning in pain. The supervisor noticed all this, as did the men, and an anxious expression crossed his face.

“Iskren almighty you look awful. You’re ill, man.” Said the supervisor, sizing the soldier up and down. “Go on your way, now, you’re not fit to do this. Eduárd! Come on over here, we need a hand in this, we’re a man down.” He snapped, helping the sick soldier up to his feet and sending him away with a pat on the back, before calling to one of the soldiers in the distance who had been sitting around idly.

“That’s another one. Whole army’s sick with it, I heard.” Commented a soldier as he watched the sick Bartók hobble away.

“Sick with what?” Asked another.

“I dun’ know. Could be anything.” Shrugged the soldier, whose eyes were still fixated elsewhere.

“How about you two actually get something done for Iskren’s sake! Bunch of good-for-nothing whelps.” Barked the supervisor and at once the two soldiers turned their attention back to their duties.

“Just how are we supposed to cart this thing back to Obersrath?” Groaned one of the men, looking at the large cannon as he hauled a barrel of cannonballs to the wagon.

“Could abandon it y’know…it was barely useful anyways.”

“This thing cost more Glänzen to make than you’ll ever earn in your life, Eduárd! So we are carting this thing to Obersrath despite your complaining! So quit it!”

“Quvite so.” Said a voice, who Lyrenz had not noticed before. Turning his attention to the voice, he saw a stubby middle-aged man dressed in a blue doublet and yellow hoses. His eyes were covered by spectacles, which Lyrenz had only seen worn by the respectable scholars back in Wyvern’s Rest. The man was also observing the supervisor and his soldiers dismantle the bombard, and he carried a proud and smug expression on his face.

“Besides, ve vould have made much better use of eet if ze hatt leesened to my calibrations.” Explained the stumpy man, and his strong Hallish accent resonated in every word.

“Oh shut up about your calibrations!” Groaned the supervisor.

“But you all deed not leesen, and now look at vere ve are…” Continued the Hallishman, a proud smirk drawn across his face as he delighted in explaining the errors of the supervisor and his men.

“You keep on talking and I’ll strike you in the face!” Threatened the supervisor, and the men chuckled.

“Say, goot Hallishman, how vill ve cart ze bombard to Obersrath?” Laughed another soldier, imitating the accent of the Hallish artillery officer. The Hallishman did not pay his mocking any heed, however, and answered his question immediately.

“Ve vill have to cart eet vith tventy horses.” Explained the Hallishman, and the men laughed again.

Lyrenz let out a chuckle at the Hallish artillery officer’s words, before his rosy and wet face suddenly donned the same glum expression that it had been wearing before. Noticing that the constant rain would not stop, and giving a final look at the numerous tents that were being torn down, he entered his own refuge of comfort, and found his squire, Fryderic, sitting comfortably by the table.

“Sir.” Greeted the squire humbly. His eyes were focused on a pamphlet that he was reading calmly.

“Frytsche.” Said Lyrenz, calling his squire by his nickname, which had been in use for years. He turned to the pamphlet that Frytsche was reading, his eyes darting from left to right, before he snatched it away from his squire’s hands.

“Where’d you get this?” He asked in an interrogative manner, and his squire immediately coloured up, his cheeks turning a bright red.

“A friend got it at Obersrath. They gave it to me.”

“Then you can tell your friend to stop reading Reformist writings. Bloody Riddish.” Snapped Lyrenz, tearing the pamphlet apart. His mood was already dampened by the rain and the miserable state of the Syrdish army, and now a sour expression crossed his face. He looked for somewhere to direct his anger, and as his eyes turned again to his squire, he spat.

“Clean it.” He said, unsheathing his sword and throwing it onto the table. It hit the wood with a sudden clang, startling Frytsche, who looked at Lyrenz with a concerned look.

“Does it…need cleaning?”

“I don’t know. Just clean it.” Barked the young knight, and at once his squire picked up the sword, though not before giving another worried and anxious look at Lyrenz.

“What’s gotten into you, Sir?” Said Frytsche, picking up the sword calmly, his tender blue eyes gazing at the young knight.

“Nothing. Now be off.” Snapped Lyrenz, and at once the squire went on his way, sword and cloth in hand. The pitter-patter of the rain did not cease, and letting out a short sniffle and wiping his hand with his palm, Lyrenz sat down on the tent’s table, resting his head on his right hand, as he closed his eyes and mulled over the events of the past week. He was anxious, and for good reason. Not only had the army’s situation taken a turn for the worse with the recent downpours, the young knight had found himself in a worrying situation—a culmination of unfortunate events that he regretted, if only slightly.

Lyrenz’s relationship with Lénárd had not improved after Uzhental. Taking Count Jakob’s word to heart, he resisted the old noble’s tirades and lambastings with a growing anger. Arguments between the two became common, as did headaches for Duke Martyn, who had become thoroughly exhausted by their quarrelling, as well as Lénárd’s constant calls for punishment for Lyrenz. Yesterday, however, things had taken a particularly bad turn. They had resumed an argument from the other day, over inconsequential matters concerning the siege, but that useless dispute had boiled over into a row, and soon insults were being traded between each other. Whatever the case, he now found himself in an unenviable spot, unlikely to get the Duke’s or Lénárd’s forgiveness (though he didn’t want it anyways, despite its advantages).

“Sir Lyrenz…” Said a voice from outside the tent, and the young knight turned his gaze to see who it was. It was his squire Frytsche, whose head was peering inside the tent, an uneasy expression on his face.

“Is there something wrong with the sword?” Spat Lyrenz, irritated by the interruption of his sulking.

“There are some men here. They wish to speak with you.” Replied the squire, still anxious. Lyrenz motioned for Frytsche to let them in, and at once the strong and sturdy image of Sir Béla strode into the tent, followed by a man dressed in a doublet and chaperon, his hand resting on the pommel of his sword. Sir Béla was a reputable knight in Martyn’s service, who always sat around stroking his moustache attentively and smiling warmly, as he chimed in with witty or not so witty remarks. He had made somewhat of a friend out of Lyrenz, who stood up at once to greet him, giving a quick curtsy to the man, who stroked his thick moustache before motioning for Lyrenz to sit down, which he did.

“Did you really have to speak to him like that?” Said the man in the fanciful doublet and chaperon, who began pacing up and down the tent, his face twisting into an annoyed and irksome expression. Lyrenz’s already bitter face soured even further, as he realised the reason for Sir Béla’s arrival—he had already spent the entire morning mulling over what to do, did he really need his friend and another man to hammer in how sorry of a state he was in?

“Iskren’s sake, not this…”

“Iskren’s sake indeed. From what I heard there were some very uniskrenist sayings traded between you two.” Chuckled Sir Béla, stroking his moustache again.

“So what are you here for? To ask that I apologise?”

“Well, yes.” Answered Sir Béla curtly, which provoked a surprised expression on Lyrenz’s face, as he turned to gaze at the Count, dumbfounded.

“I won’t let him speak to me like that again. All he does is chastise, and chastise, and I’ve had it! I won’t take it, and I’ll say what I said yesterday again if I have to.”

“Perhaps you took Count Jakob’s advice too generously. You quarrel with him every passing day of the week. His Grace…is not pleased, Lyrenz.” Said Béla, and Lyrenz blushed at the mention of Count Jakob. The young knight gazed bitterly at Béla, before speaking.

“I am saddened to hear that.” He said sarcastically, his voice not containing a single bit of seriousness. Jakob let out a quiet chuckle, not surprised by his response, before turning back with that recognisable warm face.

“You’ll have to make it up to him. Apologise, that is.”

“I shall not!”

“Oh yes you will!” Said the one in the fanciful doublet, casting a hateful glare at the young knight, astounded by his stubbornness. Lyrenz recognised him to be yet another of those valets and servants of His Grace, though he wasn’t too sure.

“His Grace wants this tidied up, Lyrenz, and Lénárd calls for your dismissal. If you don’t apologise and end this now, you’ll end up back in Wyvern’s Rest—or worse.” Informed Béla.

“And why are you all here? Why should any of you care?”

“Consider it a favour. So don’t waste it.” Snapped the knight, his warm smile fading momentarily, before being brought back. Lyrenz sighed, and said nothing, burying his face in his hands for a second, before turning back with tired eyes.

“I won’t apologise. If he wants to put it right, then he can ask for satisfaction. And if he doesn’t ask for satisfaction, then I will.”

“Satisfaction?” Asked Béla, the furrow on his brow deepening, before he realised what the young knight meant. “Ha! They’d never let you do that…no, they wouldn’t. Besides, if you demanded satisfaction and killed him in the process, His Grace would be very…upset, and it’d be over for you.”

“What’s to be done then?” Asked Lyrenz, shrugging his soldiers.

“Apologise! On your knees preferably!” Cried the man in the doublet.

“Make it up like two good Iskrenists and settle this matter. No one wants it getting out of hand, least of all His Grace.” Explained Béla, trying to make Lyrenz see reason.

“Did he send you? His Grace, that is?”

“We came here of our own accord.” Replied Béla. Lyrenz shrugged again, and Béla sighed at the young knight’s stubbornness. “Oh you are obstinate, aren’t you?” He groaned in an exasperated voice. Seeing his friend in such a state did worry Lyrenz, who looked at Béla and the man in the fanciful doublet with a dismayed expression, as he realised what giving in would entail.

“Fine.” He said quickly. “I won’t apologise, but I can try to settle things, like two good iskrenists.”

Sir Béla’s lips broke into a wide smile, his face beaming, as he congratulated the knight’s decision. “Thank you! Thank you, Sir Lyrenz, thank you. You don’t know how much of a favour you’ve done yourself, really…wonderful news, it is. Now hurry and settle it with Vitesz before he’s gotten His Grace to sign off on your dismissal.” He exclaimed with a happy expression, and Lyrenz at once got up from his seat, his expression brightened by Béla’s words. Exiting the tent, he looked at the sky, then to the camp around him, before his eyes cast a gaze at the city of Alleshof in the distance. The men that had been carting the gunpowder and cannonballs away had gone—the rain had not.

Moving through the streets of tents that were gradually being torn down and packed up, Lyrenz made his way to the centre of the Syrdish war camp, to where Duke Martyn—and Lénárd Vitesz—would be. There was a sombre mood surrounding every soldier and camp follower there, but also a feeling of relief. The miserable conditions that they had lived through in the past weeks appeared to be coming to an end; the Syrdish army was abandoning the Siege of Alleshof. It had taken four months and a week of torrential rains and sickness for the men to finally give up.

Passing a series of tents packed tightly together, Lyrenz came to the ducal tent of His Grace. Servants, pages and valets were all gathered around it, getting all the Duke’s matters in order. His Grace was not there, possibly handling some other matter on the other side of the camp, though Lyrenz had no way of knowing. Lénárd Vitesz, on the other hand, was standing by the tent, issuing out orders to every man nearby, though he himself did not help in the packing up at all. A glum, miserable expression was on his face, which occasionally twisted to form an angered look, as he shouted to one of the valets about getting something wrong or right.

Lénárd turned his gaze, and his eyes met Lyrenz’s. A bitter look was shared between the two, but Lyrenz’s face softened, and walking timidly over, a small sense of regret resonating within him as he curtsied to the Sir, and prepared to set things straight. Lénárd stared at him, squinting his eyes, as he adopted a proud and lofty look, not even giving a single act of deference to Lyrenz.

“Sir.” Said Lyrenz quietly, unsure of his words.

“What is it? I don’t need you right now.” Snapped Lénárd, his mind having before been turned to other matters, and his face twisted to form a distubed and irritated expression, Lyrenz’s intrusion on his affairs having clearly dampened his mood.

“Sir, I thought…we could perhaps discuss a few matters.”

“Make it quick.” Barked Lénárd, his proud air of authority never having left him, much to Lyrenz’s annoyance. He held his head high, in an authoritative posture as if he was Lyrenz’s superior, which he did claim to be.

“I think it would be wise if we were to…settle these matters between us. As two good Iskrenists.” Continued Lyrenz, his confidence wavering. Lénárd responded only with a simple “hm”, which only irritated Lyrenz further.

“Mind you, I have not come to apologise!” Informed the young knight, his voice getting louder as he asserted himself, straightening posture to put himself on equal footing with Vitesz. “It is simply of my belief, that these disputes will simply do us, and the army, no good. Shall we not, then, put all these things to rest? What say you? As two good Iskrenists?” He asked, waiting impatiently for Vitesz’s reply. Lénárd gazed at him with a cold expression, his air of aloofness only growing further, as he adopted a posture that made him seem as if he was above everything, including Lyrenz. Only when he had reinforced this feeling of superiority did he finally move to make a response. He turned away from Lyrenz and entered the tent of Duke Martyn, before coming back out again with a small scroll of parchment, bound together by the seal of the Lord-Constable.

“This is what you will present to Ferenc and his company.” He said curtly, as if he hadn’t heard a word of what Lyrenz had said. The young knight looked at Vitesz in some confusion, but he nevertheless took the scroll with curiosity, as his eyes darted between it and Vitesz’s face.

“I don’t understand…Sir. What is it?” He asked, his eyes gazing back to the scroll.

“It is a letter, explaining that His Grace has seen it fit to appoint you as an adjutant to Ferenc Készögyi, the leader of Készögyi’s Company of huszars. Do you understand now?” Explained Lénárd, but his words only deepened Lyrenz’s expression of confusion,

“Adjutant? To a company of huszars? For what reason?”

“Because it appears that they’ve grown increasingly…reluctant to read the orders sent from His Grace. It would be good if we had a man of ours with them, relaying messages between the company and the Duke’s command…and ensure those messages are obeyed.”

“But the huszars? Sir, I know I may have upset you…but the huszars? Is that really my punishment?” Protested Lyrenz, scowling as he realised his fate. Yet Lénárd again adopted the same proud and lofty posture, and acted as if he hadn’t listened to a word, ignoring any mention of their dispute.

“I want you with them by tomorrow morning. Make sure to present the letter to Sir Ferenc.” He continued, rebuking Lyrenz’s words. The young knight’s scowl deepened, and at once he began asking all sorts of questions and all sorts of protests, hoping that at least one would convince Vitesz.

“For how long must I stay with them?”

“For as long as His Grace wishes.”

“They’re scum.”

“If that’s what you believe.”

“How am I supposed to maintain order in a whole company of huszars? They’re scoundrels, they won’t listen to a word I say.”

“You can try.”

“I won’t ride with them.”

“They’re His Graces’ orders.”

“You’re punishing me for a petty dispute, I won’t have it!”

“They’re His Graces’ orders.” Repeated Lénárd, his tone cold and uncaring.

“If you want satisfaction from me, you can damn well ask for it, coward!” Spat Lyrenz, but Lénárd again ignored his words, and interrupted him.

“His Grace wants you to get your things in order by tomorrow. Take your squire…whatever his name is…if you wish.” He ordered. Lyrenz looked at him with an exasperated face, the bitterness of their rivalry rising within him as it had the last night. Vitesz remained there motionless, his cold and aloof expression, stunning the knight. Where was the arrogant and spiteful man from the day before, who had taken great offence at each one of Lyrenz’s remarks, and did not wait to start a dispute with him? The air of authority with which Vitesz carried himself now angered Lyrenz and he stood there, scowling at Lénárd, waiting for the man to make any sort of response, any sort of exclamation, or shout.

Then suddenly Lénárd turned to one of the other aides, and his callous expression at once turned to one of anger, as he began shouting. “Lázár! Where have you been?! Idiotic little…” He began, before walking off, leaving Lyrenz by himself, quite perplexed at having been rebuked in such a manner. He still held the letter in his hand.

***
The next morning the Syrdish army had packed just about everything and was beginning the march back to Obersrath. The sick were carted along, the dead were buried by the road, and the still living and healthy set off on the journey back, abandoning the siege of Alleshof once and for all.

Lyrenz, for his part, spent the night before and the early morning mulling over his options and what to do. He had been rebuked by Vitesz, and, as he saw it, had then been punished by Lénárd and the Duke by being given a most detestable assignment: aide to the captain of a company of Huszars. His predicament left him awake all night as he pondered how to approach it. He had half a mind to simply leave the army and return to Wyvern’s Rest, attaching himself again to King Karlus. The luxuries of court life were not to be passed over, after all, and for all the court’s harsh rigidity and boredom, it was sure to be better than the huszars in all ways. Yet then his mind turned to the disgrace it would bring him to simply excuse himself and scurry off back to the safe comfort of the capital. The cowardice!

Another part of his mind pondered seriously on the thought of demanding satisfaction and challenging Vitesz to an honourable duel, which was as ludicrous as it was enticing to the young knight, for he was sure to win, and the thought of wounding or killing his miserable rival was indeed alluring. Yet then his thoughts turned to the stupidity and ridiculousness of the entire idea, and he groaned in frustration, realising the futility of trying to find a method of escape from his situation. In the end, he relented, and packing up his things, mounted his horse and rode off towards the huszars, with his squire Frytsche by his side.

On the way he encountered Count Jakob Zalan. The Count was in a resplendent suit of armour, mounted atop his dark black horse, and riding along the side of the road with an anxious expression. Upon catching sight of Lyrenz, the Count’s face eased, and at once he adopted that warm smile, which was so familiar to Lyrenz. The two had developed somewhat of a friendship after the Battle of Uzhental, with Count Jakob delivering Lyrenz reports about the state of the war occasionally, while Lyrenz in turn regaled the Count with all sorts of stories that made Jakob erupt with laughter. Bringing his horse to a slower trot so that Lyrenz could catch up quicker, the Count awaited the young knight’s greeting.

“My Lord.” He said, making a small bow as he began riding by the Count’s side, while Frytsche rode behind the two, listening attentively to their conversation, though occasionally his mind and eyes wandered—either to the rows of the men that marched just to his right, or to the long forest to his left. With autumn’s departure the first leaves had begun to fall, at first one by one, then en masse, so that the hooves of the three men’s horses were always trampling another group of leaves, always making a squelching noise as they did so.

“Ah, Sir Lyrenz! It has been a while.” Welcomed the Count, as he kicked his horse back to a trot, and Lyrenz did the same. “I trust things have remained well with you?” He inquired, his warm and friendly expression easing the young knight.

“Somewhat, My Lord.” Replied Lyrenz, quietly, and his words lit up the Count’s face, as he suddenly remembered something important.

“Oh.” He said quietly, a brief smirk flashing across his face, before continuing. “Oh, yes, yes, you’ve been assigned to a company of huszars haven’t you? Is that’s what got you miserable?” He asked, and Lyrenz, having been reminded of his terrible misfortune, groaned.

“Oh please, My Lord…I’ve had enough reminding of that. Yes, I’m miserable. I assume you don’t have any remedy for it?”

“I have a bottle of wine, if you wish.” Said the Count, laughing at his joke. Lyrenz chuckled if only slightly, but even the Count’s humour was not enough to break his sour mood. Growing quiet once again, he turned his gaze to the mass of trees to his left, but his thoughts were interrupted by Count Jakob. “Bah, you shouldn’t get along too bad with the huszars. They may have a nasty reputation but…” Argued the Count, but when he found no excuse or good word to put in for the huszars, he trailed off. Lyrenz smirked, amused by his friend’s failure to cheer him up, while the Count looked for another topic to talk about. He turned his gaze briefly to the column of men marching through the road, and his face lit up again.

“A damn shame, this business here at Alleshof. This whole past week’s been miserable…ceaseless rains, and a whole damn sickness taking hold of the men too.” Remarked Jakob, bringing up the constantly discussed topic of the war, and the progress and setbacks made by the Syrdish army. Lyrenz had long grown tired of such talk, but he entertained the Count’s discussion for a while longer, his curiosity pushing the words out of his mouth.

“Where shall we go now, My Lord, when winter breaks next year? Shall we march north, as has been rumoured?”

“It is likely. We will continue to press the attack eastward, towards Rupperstadt, but we must hold our northern flank just as well. Otherwise our supply lines…it’d be a mess. We’d be cut off. Yet it won’t be easy. Some of the Hallish lords, I’ll spare you the details, but some of the Hallish lords would rather we keep the fighting here in Korbek and have asked us to do so.”

“But that’s ludicrous!”

“Indeed. Indeed. It seems that if we march north to bring justice to men like Landgrave Jan Sigismund, we’ll only bring more and more lords against us. Yet we have no choice but to go north. It’s simply ludicrous…yes, ludicrous like you said. Greatest save us.” He said anxiously, making the sign of The Greatest and pressing it to his lips.

“May His Will deliver us from a long and bloody war.” Prayed Lyrenz, making a similar show of his faith, as he turned his gaze upwards to the sky. He smiled, and bid farewell to Jakob, before kicking his horse to a gallop and riding over to the huszars.

While the Syrdish army marched back to Obersath along an old stone road, built in the times of when the Kostuans had once governed Halland with their magistrates and governors, the Syrdish huszars had taken a different path. Instead they took a more obscure and downtrodden road that stood parallel to the path of Duke Martyn’s main force. With this they marched back to Obersrath, riding ahead of the rest of the army. Yet the country here was not fresh—in the time that the Syrdish army had spent in Halland, the fields and meadows between Obersrath and Alleshof had been stripped bare of valuables and food, leaving few pickings for raids which was irksome to the huszars, who relied on such endeavours to sustain themselves when money fell short.

It was for this reason that when Lyrenz rode up to the vanguard of Ferenc’s company of huszars, he found them all to be in an irritated mood, ready to erupt in anger at the slightest intrusion to their sulking. The young knight, dressed in great plate armour, and followed by his squire Frytsche, who held the banner of his house in one hand, proved to be such an intrusion. His approach provoked grunts and remarks from the riders, who were dressed in loose-fitting kaftans, while feather-topped fur hats adorned their heads. Many carried lances in their hands, with a bow strung to their backs, and a sheathed sabre by their belt. They gazed at the intrusion to their sulking with some curiosity, intrigued by Lyrenz’s appearance.

While most of them rode in a long line, a small group was separated from the rest, riding ahead as a vanguard. One of the huszars in that crowd bore the banner of the company, and Lyrenz—without paying any attention to those who he had ridden past—galloped towards that small vanguard, and approached the man who seemed to be its leader. His approach brought the vanguard to a brief halt, as the men in the small group sized Lyrenz up and down, before the supposed leader spoke up.

“‘o are you?” He said, in a hoarse voice. Like many others, he was dressed in a bright red kaftan, with long yellow boots that reached up to just below his knees. A green fur hat, almost in the shape of a bag, adorned the top of his head, and was itself decorated with three large feathers, which rustled in the wind. His almost bronze hair was receding slowly from his temple, while a great moustache graced his upper lip. His short eyes were squinted as he gazed closely at Lyrenz, and his large nose flared upward, as he struck an almost intimidating pose, hoping to get some reaction out of Lyrenz.

The young knight, trying half-heartedly to contain his revulsion and disgust, took Lénárd’s letter from Frytsche and handed it to the man, before speaking. “I am Sir Lyrenz Reimund. I’ve been appointed by His Grace to serve here as some sort of adjutant.” He said authoritatively, adopting a lofty expression, as he situated himself above all the others in terms of status. The supposed leader took the letter and opened it to begin reading, but recognising the Duke’s seal, he pocketed it.

“I’ll ‘ave Bártas read over it. So you’re our supervision?”

“If that’s what you wish to call it.” Replied Lyrenz, and the man laughed.

“Some supervision! D’ya believe it, Lészek?” He chuckled, turning his gaze to one of the men in the group around him. “Sent a pup in knight’s clothin’, they did, hah! We’ll see about you later. But for now…keep up!” He barked, addressing Lyrenz, before kicking his horse to a gallop with a loud “hyah!”, followed shortly by the others, who rode behind their leader.

Rolais, Corcaigh Mor, Saeju, Cheysal serulea, and 3 othersRyeongse, Alvaringen, and Eskeland

The Battle of Göran

Council Room, Royal Palace, Tidahamn

Footsteps could be heard coming from the corridor outside the council room, coming closer and closer, they sounded as if someone had urgency. Grand Regent Stefan was inside the council room together with two other regents. They were in the middle of a small session discussing future affairs of the country and the coronation ceremony for Theodor, the future new king.

Suddenly the doors of the council room opened and in came a courier, he had a face of desperation. In his hand he had a letter, he approached the regents and spoke, "Sires!" Exhausted from the long trip he took a deep breath before continuing, "I have a letter for you. I believe it is of utmost importance."

The regents looked at each other in curiosity, what could possibly be that important? "Very well, hand it over, let us have a look." Said Stefan. The courier handed the letter over and the regents read it. From their look, the courier, who himself was curious to know what the contents of the letter were, knew it was serious. The letter contained an official declaration of war from Mikhail, also declaring himself King of the Eskelians against the order of the regency.

"So the rat finally came out of his hiding hole... I guess we were wrong about good ol' Miroslav." Said Stefan, he wasn't impressed, much less worried about it, he didn't find his declaration of war threatening, just a small revolt that he would put down before the arrival of Theodor. Revolts weren't uncommon in Eskeland upon the ascension of a new king. Stefan handed the letter over to the other regent to his left, "Here, tell me what do you think of this Mikkel, I personally find this quite amusing."

Mikkel, the Lord Minister and one of the regents, took the letter, unlike Stefan he was nervous that this could cause more problems further down the line or even worse, a war at a larger scale never seen in the country since the War of the Princes back in 110 ATF when King Alderik III engaged in a full on war against the eastern princes. Mikkel looked at Stefan with a face of concern, "Stefan, I think we should take this more seriously lest it gets out of hand and plunges our country into further chaos, we already have enough with the death of a king, let us not add another thing to worry about."

"I say you worry too much Mikkel, this is but a simple revolt, they will tire of it after a while and everything will be over, we put the leaders to trial and done, just like it has been done for hundreds of years."

"You think it is that simple Stefan? There is much space for concern here!" Mikkel's tone rose as he got more angry at the small amount of concern displayed by Stefan, he stood up from his chair and smashed his fist against the table, "Listen here Stefan, the people are angry enough with the choice we made of inviting another prince to rule when the son of Karl is still alive and well, we allowed paranoia to overtake us. It wouldn't surprise me if those same people joined Mikhail in his rebellion, and as you know, we can't allow him to come, take over and crown himself king, his claim is false!"

"Yes yes, I heard you argument, howe-"

Stefan was quickly interrupted by Einer, the third regent present that day, he had been quiet the whole time the two were arguing with each other, he however could not allow the to continue and decided to speak, "Enough the both of you, while I think what Mikkel is saying is correct I also believe Stefan is right. Mikhail is certainly a threat, I never liked him, however we do not know enough yet about what is going on to really take a harsh action against him yet. Prince Theodor will be here in a month, he can solve this problem then. How about we send a force of seven thousand men to Helsingstad? That will show him that we are ready to quell any rebellions from him. He couldn't possibly have a proper army."

Stefan thought about it for a while before giving his approval, the same went for Mikkel, "Very well Einer, let us go with your idea and since you are the one that came up with the idea, and seeing that Holmberg is occupied somewhere else, how about you go? Tell Lindgren and Drakenberg to go with you, stay for a few days over there until things calm down, I am going to send a letter to Mikhail to cease immediately .

"I guess I will have to cancel my plans to go out with my wife to the theatre this weekend." He said in a hush tone, scratching his chin, "Alright, I shall depart as soon as possible, I need to send a letter to Lindgren and Drakenberg to meet me here in Tidahamn. Let us leave today's meeting here shall we?" Stefan and Mikkel nodded.

---------------------

Some days later, Main Plaza, Helsingstad

Mikhail was in the main plaza of Helsingstad doing some last minute inspection of the troops he was going to send towards Junheim Castle and some last minute review of the plans to make sure nothing went wrong. He hoped to quickly conquer the castle and send a message to the regents that he meant business and that his claim was to be recognised. One of his men approached him with a letter in hand, and told him it was from Grand Regent Stefan. Mikhail took it and read it in hopes that they had finally decided to concede amidst his threats, however it wasn't that, it read the following:

To the pretentious Duke Mikhail in the grace of the gods,

We, the regents, demand that you cease your threats of rebellion immediately, otherwise, any attempts from your part to rebel will be quelled with force and you will be sentenced to death for treason against the Regency, his future majesty Prince Theodor and the country. If you do not wish to meet this fate and find yourself in Miskunn's realm cease immediately. An army has been dispatched to the area as a warning.

Sincerely,

The Grand Regent.

Upon reading it, Mikhail's mood soured, he was balancing between the emotions of anger and disappointment upon hearing that they hadn't recognised it. Yet this did not deter him from it. He threw the letter away, not caring a bit about quelling the whole rebellion thing, he was going for it.

"Gottfrid!" Shouted Mikhail, calling his general to come. The general appeared from amongst the soldiers, he came from talking with his commanders. "Gottfrid, listen, slight change of plans, you will continue with what we discussed previously but I want you to be alert, it seems like the enemy has sent an army to the region, perfect opportunity for us to see how good our army is and if this new tactic will work at all. Ambush them, deceive them, make them think that is all we have. I will send reinforcements later, understand?" Gottfrid nodded. Mikhail climbed onto a small stage he had previously set up, and turned to face the soldiers who were all lined up in formations ready to depart. "Soldiers! Today is the beginning of your duties as emissaries of justice. We have all seen what those in Tidahamn are capable of doing just to satiate their own ambition and greed, but no more, we are going to fight! And all of you shall lead that fight. They think we don't mean business, but oh we certainly do, let us show them that we won't stop until all of our demands are met. Now go and may the gods keep you all safe!" The Soldiers cheered at the words of Mikhail, even the civilians present there at the plaza cheered too. The general and his commander mounted their horses and with a move of his sword the march towards Junheim Castle began.

---------------------

[i]Several days after, Near Göran[/b]

The army of Einer was marching towards Helsingstad. The condition of the roads made it all the more difficult for them to move any faster, they were all muddy due to the heavy rain of previous days, the small supply train they had with them would get stuck many times and they would have to stop just to unstuck it. Riding in front with him were his commanders and they were having a conversation between each other. Einer was the whole ride in an anxious mood, which drove him to distract himself with some conversation, "I do not like this I tell you, I have this feeling that something will go wrong and as if it wasn't enough that we have to stop almost every twenty minutes to dig the carts out of the mud."

"The rain has certainly made things more difficult for us, but surely you are exaggerating Einer, we only have to stay stationed in Helsingstad for some days, nothing is going to happen. I highly doubt that this Mikhail means any business, he just wants to send a scare to the Grand Regent in hopes of killing him due to his old age." Said Sven Lindgren, one of the commanders, while laughing at his own joke.

"Maybe we should camp here for some time before departing for Helsingstad again, I'm sure that will do great for the morale of the men and by then the roads might be in better condition." Said Thomas Drakenberg, the third commander. He wasn't worried about anything much less desperate to reach Helsingstad. Of the three, Drakenberg acted as the voice of reason, however this time it wouldn't work.

"No, we cannot waste any time, we need to be in Helsingstad by tomorrow, who knows what he might be up to, it may seem like nothing now but the more time passes the worse it gets." Saud Einer, desperation, anxiousness, nervousness, all of those emotions could be seen on his face and in the reactions of his body more clear than water.

Drakenberg, to lighten the mood, decided to change the subject, "You know, I'm quite excited for the arrival of the prince, I must say it was a surprise to hear of the exile of the royal family after the death of the king, Prince Ludvig was quite popular with the people, however it seemed like he carried a not so bright legacy, his predecessors weren't the best of kings and pretty much tarnished the name of the av Varbergs."

"Yes I agree." Said Lindgren, "Who knows maybe Prince Theodor is the good change we all need, I for one am tired of hearing of all of this corruption within the council, nothing gets done, sometimes it feels like we have it worse than the people in Windstaat. I say long live Prince Theodor and may his reign be prosperous! What do you think Einer?"

"I can't say much, I am very conflicted with this one, on one hand I am glad that we are getting a new prince but at the same time It is like, It feels weird , I've known Prince Ludvig since he was a small child and just allowing this feels like a betrayal. Wait a second... Everyone, halt! Who are those?" Einer called the army to a stop, he saw the movement of what seemed like a small army in the distance, he took some time to think of his next move, he didn't want to take any rash decisions since he thought it could be one of the local baron's armies. Einer took the decision to ride towards the army to meet with whoever its leader was.

Upon approaching the army he was greeted by a familiar face, Lord Gottfrid Enviken, the lord of Enviken and one of his friends. Einer greeted him with a smile, however Gottfrid's greeting was less friendly, "Einer, curious seeing you around this parts, what brings you here?" Said Gottfrid.

"I would say the same about you Gottfrid. I am on my way to Helsingstad, I was sent by the Grand Regent to keep things under control, they say Duke Mikhail has decided to mount a little revolt."

"Ah so you must be who Mikhail was talking about, I guess he was right."

"Come again?"

"You heard me right, Einer. I am loyal to Mikhail's cause. I am on my way to Junheim Castle to conquer it in his name unless you are willing to do me a favour and surrender and tell Stefan to do the same."

"So that is it isn't it? You are turning against your rightful liege to follow that charlatan in his false endeavour? His claims are false, he has no proof nor base, you are going blind into this, I thought you were better than this Gottfrid."

"Yes well, I thought the same of you Einer, you value freedom above all else yet you bow to this tyrants, even if Mikhail's claim was false I would still follow him because he promised us something those who you answer too could never provide, a solution to all the problems that have plagued this country for the past two centuries."

"You truly have gone mad Gottfrid, eating up all those lies like nothing, but I guess there is no convincing you is there?"

"No."

"Then I guess you know what this means right?" Gottfrid nodded, "I can't allow you to go any further than this. I would recommend you to surrender now and avoid what is about to come." Einer returned back to his position to start planning out his strategy for the upcoming battle. Meanwhile on the other side Gottfrid started deploying his troops in formations to defend themselves.

Einer quickly convened with his generals for the best strategy, "We were wrong on one thing this time, they do have an army but it is small, what I fear is the quality of it, they seem well trained so this won't be an easy battle, we need to approach them carefully." Said Einer.

"Now hold on, it's just a few peasants there is no way they are able to inflict any major damage, let us charge in and be done with it." Suggested Lindgren.

"Are you out of your head Lindgren, even if it was just an army of untrained soldiers it doesn't mean we have to go charging in like that, we need to take a moderate approach to them. I have a plan. From what I can see their army isn't stronger than four thousand soldiers. They have two cavalry divisions stationed in the back, that is where the general must be, there are two archer divisions on each hill giving them the advantage in that case. It seems they also brought in spearmen, if we send the cavalry in they will surely form a spear wall. Finally in the front there's 4 regiments of swordsmen." Said Drakenberg. He scratched his chin. He pondered over which would be the best way to engage them, "This is quite the forested area, we might be able to use it to our advantage."

"Tell us what you have in mind, Drakenberg." Said Einer.

"This is my plan, Lindgren, you will move forward with the swordsmen to engage theirs, then Einer will send in the halberdiers to the sides to engage the spearman in the back, that will keep them busy. Of course they will be under heavy fire from the archers but that will give time for Lindgren to charge in with the cavalry to take them out. I will send the archers to the forest to use them as cover and start firing from there to the enemy. Einer's cavalry should easily take them out in one charge, of course the enemy will send in their cavalry to try and stop you, when they do that I will command the archers to shoot at them, you will retreat back out to avoid them and once they are under fire, you will charge the archers again and end them. By then the enemy spearmen should be too occupied to care and that is when you will charge them from the back. Is everything clear?" Lindgren and Einer nodded in agreement to Drakenberg's plan.

"May Farehir grant us victory in this day." Said Einer and Lindgren. Drakenberg, who was an Iskrenite, prayed to The Greatest for his protection. "I can't believe I am about to raise a sword against someone who used to be my friend, but if this is the will of the gods then may they have mercy on all of us." Said Einer to himself, lowering his visor. Drakenberg and Lindgren also lowered theirs.

Lindgren gave the order to his men to begin advancing, while Drakenberg began moving towards the forest. Einer's cavalry stood their ground until the moment for the charge to arrive.
As Lindgren's men got closer to the enemy's line, the enemy archer began opening fire, Lindgren quickly ordered them to raise their shields to protect themselves from the arrows, "Men! Raise your shields and brace yourself!" Lindgren also raised him. The arrows started falling, some made it through hitting some of the soldiers but they were able to protect themselves from the rest. Under the heavy rain of arrows the soldiers kept advancing until they were close enough and that is when Lindgren gave the order, "Men! Lower shields and prepare to charge! Leave none alive, those bastards need to pay for their treachery!" Shouted Lindgren, the soldiers let out a battle cry as they charged, their swords and shields clashing against those of the enemy.

Meanwhile back at the top of the hill, Einer watched as they charged in engaging in with the enemy, that is when he knew to send in the halberdiers to flank the enemy spearmen, "Halberdiers move forward and flank the spearmen from the sides, make sure none of them slip away." The halberdiers went forwards. Arrows rained upon them but they kept going and upon charging distance they lowered their halberds and charged the enemy.

Some time after and with most of the enemy army engaged and their archers exposed, Einer called his cavalry, "Cavalry! Split up in two, one engages the left side, the other the right." With a movement of his sword he ordered the charge, "Charge!" The cavalry went forward with their spears in hand. Riding through the field Einer could feel an emotion of freedom he hadn't felt in many years. Spears lowered they clashed against the archers sending some flying from the impact of the horses upon them.

While that was happening, Drakenberg led the archers through the forest, the air was heavy and filled with tension, and while everything seemed secure, some didn't feel that way, and Drakenberg himself started to feel it, he felt as if someone was watching them. The forest was very dense, but it wasn't sparse enough either for them to be able to see with perfection, and a strange fog had set in. Despite that they kept going forward to reach their objective.

Positioned in place they began drawing their bows to shoot, when suddenly the sound of a horn distracted them, "What was that?" Said one of the soldiers. Suddenly the ground started shaking and the hooves of horses stomping the ground could be heard. From the fog came out two regiments of horsemen charging against them. It took them by surprise causing panic amongst the soldiers. Drakenberg tried to calm them down. The cavalry impacted upon them, the soldiers panicked. Some started fleeing, but those that remained tried to mount some sort of defence.

Since the forest wasn't dense enough, the enemy cavalry had the freedom of movement in they advantage, being able to easily manoeuvre around. Finally the remaining archers unable to properly defend themselves broke and scattered running away. Drakenberg who tried to defend himself the best he could was eventually bested by the enemy and knocked unconscious.

Einer, meanwhile, was able to inflict heavy damage upon the enemy archers forcing some of them to retreat and killing many with their spears, and that was when the enemy cavalry charged towards them. Einer waited for Drakenberg's archer to fire arrows at them however none came. He looked towards the forest and noticed the archers running away, at that moment he realised something was wrong and ordered for a general retreat, however Lindberg and his men, who were in the middle of the fight did not hear it anything and kept fighting. The enemy cavalry from the forest descended upon them completely surrounding them. The charge broke the lines of Lindberg's men causing the fight to become uncoordinated.

The fight kept going for a good while, the brave men that resisted tried to take as many enemy soldiers as they could with them, slaying them with fierce resistance. Despite this, Einer was well on his way with whoever remained of his men to retreat, he saw as the chaos unfolded in the main line. The enemy easily broke the morale of the soldiers and they began fleeing as best they could but they couldn't and all that they could was try and fight until the end. Lindberg who was stuck there tried to rally his men however none listened, the majority of them lost hope the moment they were charged from behind. Lindberg, unable to resist, was slain by one of the enemy soldiers.

Einer who saw it all once more tried to call for a retreat, this time the halberdiers were able to escape and the men who were lucky enough to escape the slaughter regrouped with the main group. Einer quickly beat a retreat, falling back towards Vindheim where they would rest.

On the other side of the battlefield the victorious enemy soldiers cheered as they saw Einer's army retreat. The first battle of the war was won by the Solberg soldiers and that raised the morale amongst them who now had to march to siege Junheim Castle, "Sire" Said one of the commanders to Gottfrid, "We have done it! The enemy is retreating and we were able to take down most of their army, the ambush worked as you had planned, the men are in high spirits. We also captured one of the enemy commanders. What shall we do with him?"

"Great, but it is not time to celebrate yet, we have a castle to take, we can celebrate afterwards, tell the men to regroup and we will begin our march towards Junheim Castle immediately and about the enemy commander tie him up and send him back to Helsingstad." The commander nodded and went off to recall the troops. They would as soon as possible retake their march towards the castle. Drakenberg was taken back to Helsingstad.

Rolais, Corcaigh Mor, Elvhenen, Dhorvas, and 2 othersCheysal serulea, and Ryeongse

A Growing Order
Dhorvas Civil war phase 1:

Tienyu lifted a hand to shield his eyes as he walked the labyrinth passages of the citadel of Jurun. Most of the passages were lit but they had taken care to increase the light in important ones to help with direction. More than a few of their order had gotten lost in the days immediately after the citadel’s capture and the following search for any holdouts in its long, dark corridors.

The passage ahead veered to the right and as Tienyu turned he was faced with two large doors. They were intricately carved, depicting scenes of Artyanism but also Ziist and Khalva imagery. They were largely for show, unless a defense within the tunnels was necessary. Renatist temples kept their doors open as a sign of welcoming to those seeking solace within their halls. Tienyu entered and quickly spotted the individual he sought.

Galin Zhelev was kneeling before a large altar at the center of the chamber. As Artyan was the center of all, so too, then, was worship directed toward the center within Renartist temples. Behind the stone altar was a great carving of marble depicting the Artyanist knot upon a blazing sun, the symbol of the order sometimes called a Renantist knot. Three more altars stood in equal measurement around the knot, one facing each primary direction. Tienyu stopped a few paces behind Galin and waited patiently for the grand master’s prayers to finish. He could see Galin’s rosary, a necklace of prayer beads, moving in the man’s hands though he heard no audible words.

A few minutes passed before Galin dipped his head forward, hands to his chest in a sort of bow before pushing himself to his feet. Once standing, he reached out to touch a renatist knot on the center of the altar, then proceeded to touch his own forehead. Finally he turned and spoke to Tienyu.

“Are you here for guidance, Tienyu, or have you need of me?” Galin asked.

The slim and tall Dsen gave a slight bow of his head in respectful greeting before answering. “We have news that the Qatun are preparing to move against us.”

“It seems Denai feels he has an opportunity. He misinterprets our recent quiet for weakness he might exploit.”

“But why would he see our quiet as a chance to strike?” Tienyu asked. His tone made clear he thought Denai’s plan to attack was not based in wisdom. “It should be obvious we have been fortifying our new territory and the center of our Order.”

“Because he is thinking like any other warlord eager for their prize. Others have begun moving, so he must as well to expand and keep pace. By not showing signs that we intend to expand, he assumes we are idle.”

“He will be sorely mistaken,” said Tienyu.

“Yes, he will.” replied Galin. “Summon Joris. We have work to do.”

***

The battle took place not far from the boundary between the Qatun band’s territory and the land controlled by the Renatist Order. Galin had ordered a reduced presence along the border to further encourage the view of the Qatun raqan that they had indeed been idle or lacking. Several outposts had even been abandoned to allow the Qatun to advance with speed and confidence. Raqan Denai seized the opportunity presented to him and advanced with the full strength of his band to strike a quick and decisive victory and take Jurun for himself.

The Qatun army paused at the base of a mountain called Mount Tehey. Their main camp rested near a small stream. Morale among the Qatun and their leaders was high as they had found little opposition to their incursion. Things appeared to be going rather well and the atmosphere in the camp was relaxed and filled with celebration.

“Chochar, come! Have a drink.” Denai called out as his officer entered the canopy that served as Denai’s temporary headquarters. Osol and Teghai were with the commander.

Chochar accepted a goblet as the raqan poured wine. He drank before speaking. “The march continues unhindered. Your observation of the zealot order’s inability to stop us has been correct.”

“Of course, I had little doubt it would be so. We gave them too much credit during the initial rebellion.”

“They did defeat the Khatagi.” Osol interjected.

“The Khatagi were led by that old fool; Ghentai. We should have moved earlier and done it ourselves.” Denai said, dismissing Osol’s reserved observation. “Once we occupy Jurun, we will look toward the Heghal. Then we will deal with that upstart, Sabir. A dhorva band should not be ruling over a khalva band any longer.” Denai added, referring to the Ghazan conquest of the Sororan band. Chochar and Teghai echoed his words.

A cry echoed out in the camp. It was soon followed by others. Denai sighed before pouring himself another glass of wine. “I told them not to get too carried away. I do not want injuries from a drunken brawl on the eve before we take Jurun.”

***

Galin watched from his horse across the stream and within the tree line as the Order began their ambush on the camp of the Qatun band. The Order had hidden many of their forces on the other side of the mountain and in various caves that dotted the area, waiting for the Qatun. His own force waited across the stream for the eventual retreat of their enemy once they were forced from their camp. Once their enemy had clearly fallen into a deep sense of complacency and inebriation the signal had been sent to spring the trap. Joris and Dogar began by leading the smaller groups from their hiding places amongst the caves, then Tienyu and Ruth followed with the main force down from the mountain top. Soon the air was filled with shouts of fury and anguish as battle cries mixed with cries of the wounded and dying.

“Bunch of damned fools, how could they be this stupid to relax themselves so easily in enemy territory?” said a voice beside Galin.

“Not every warlord is gifted with wisdom, Ghoa.” he said, not turning his eyes from the battle before them. “Like others, he has fallen back into the way the bands were before; mostly nomadic raiders that constantly traded territory and members. His mistake is that he is treating us as he would another band. Given the opportunity, he charged deep into our territory, his aim set on Jurun and largely ignoring most else.”

Galin’s horse shifted where they stood watching the fight and he reached down to give it a comforting pat on the neck. Fires had grown throughout the Qatun camp. When he leaned upright again he turned to Ghoa this time. “But we are not a band, and our goals are not so trivial as a mere band lord. Perhaps many of them will come to join us and find a better purpose.”

The echoes from the carnage grew louder and they could now see many khemakh fleeing for the stream, hoping to cross to some safety from both blaze and blade. Galin drew his sword and held it high. Galin reached toward his neck, grasping the renatist knot and whispering a small prayer. When he brought his hand down he motioned with his sword and the column of cavalry he led charged forth to surprise the fleeing Qatun.

***

The stench of death and charred wood still clung to the air as Galin made his way through the aftermath of the battle. Joris had joined him, the frisolan man’s armor still stained with blood. Their losses had been few. Even the Qatun had not lost as many as one might have assumed from such a devastating defeat, but Qalin had ordered no pursuit of those fleeing beyond the mountain. His goal was not to kill as many as he could.

“Did we capture the raqan?” he asked Joris.

“No. The raqan died in the melee. We did capture some of the officers though.”

Joris led him to a clump of thick pines where several khemakh sat. They were not bound but they had resigned to the reality that there was no escape. They looked weary and defeated. Galin pitied them. “Names?” he asked the group.

It was several moments before a khemakh with scales that matched the color of the surrounding pines spoke up. The khemakh tried to draw himself up and Joris stepped forward. Galin waved Joris aside before motioning to the khemakh.

“Chochar.” they said.

“Walk with me.” Galin said and after a nod to Joris, he and Chochar began to move off. Joris fell in behind them. His hand stayed close to his knife. “Have you been told that your raqan has perished?”

Chochar did not respond immediately. When he finally did, his tone expressed the resignation he felt. “When he was not with us, some hoped he had escaped. Most of us knew he had likely died in the fight. It is only a guess as to how long before we join him.”

“Join him?” asked Galin.

“When you execute us.” replied Chochar.

“Ah”, Galin said in understanding. “That is not part of the plan.”

Galin noted the look of surprise in Chocharr’s eye as the khemakh eyed him, and perhaps a sign of hope? They had much to discuss and Galin began the process of seeking to find a friend where there had been an enemy. He would need them when they turned to the Qatun band’s home territory.

Elvhenen and Eskeland

MAP UPDATED (April 4th, 2022)

Tylos

Tylos Nations

Tylos Counties

Tylos Resources

Tylos Climates


Sokos
Sokos Nations

Sokos Counties

Sokos Resources

Sokos Climates

Arkonos Map


Read factbook

Eskeland

A Cursory Glance

A white sheet of snow blanketed the streets of Grafsburg; a layer of soft cotton unbroken except where the roads were trampled by foot or hoof, and churned like foul butter turned black with muck and dirt. Soft plumes of gray-black smoke fluttered from the houses across the street, and all along Grafsburg the people sheltered in safety and what warmth they could find. The winter was nearly at its conclusion, but went out with a strong, howling storm that had thrown snow all across the county and shut down nearly all commerce and travel.

Looking away from the window, Anna Katherein felt anxious at leaving the peaceful vision behind as she returned her focus to the church apartment. The years she spent in Grafsburg, living under the hospitality of the church and Prelate, brought her accomodations into a more permanent fixture. There were paintings on the wall, and a rough strewn tapestry over a century old hanging across the mantle above the fireplace; the depiction an old battle of the Alvarish against Beitensburg, which at the time were both feuding over some parcels of lands beyond the Stromar. It really was not that old of a battle, or even that far removed from the present conditions and matter of Alvaringen, but in the reality that Anna understood, it seemed so distant and unthinkable. Halland was never more united than now. The idea of feuding and war between the lords was impossible; a concept that would have brought belittlement and outrage from the hawk-minded nobles.

Her bed was made with the thicker blankets and furs, and despite the gentle crackling of the fireplace, there was still a chill that penetrated the walls of the church and bristled the skin. She hoped the weather would turn for the better soon. Across from where she sat, Enngelin Gutschen, her lady-in-waiting, and Anna Wallen, one of her maids, rested. They spoke among themselves as they waited for the Countess to finish her drink. Having eaten breakfast earlier already, Anna supped on a cup of light wine, which had been watered to the point it was nearly transparent except for a trace hue of red and a light fragrance which benefited the taste.

There was a knock at the door and almost instantly Wallen was on her feet, bounding over to see who it was. The young lady was quite fast, and in a way she was a better helper than Madelgarde, more eager and ready. Though Madelgarde was better at conversation and entertainment, and the Countess preferred that much more.

The intrusion resolved itself to be Sir Danchmer, and without even needing to see to Anna approval, the maid stepped aside and allowed her personal secretary to enter. The older man had a rather gruff appearance as he entered, having been away for a few weeks on travel to Rothhausen. He had not a chance to change out of his riding gear, and was wrapped in a heavy cloak that he pulled down from his neck to look more presentable.

“I am sure Wilhelm won’t be here?” He inquired, although already knowing the answer it was more of a formality.

Anna shook her head, placing her cup on the small table beside her.

“He won’t be, I’m afraid. No… have you heard?”

“When I was riding back through Bartholzen.” He answered, pausing for a moment as the young Wallen inquired if he wanted anything to eat or drink. He continued after sending her away back to her chair. “I had half a mind to go and see Spaichingen myself, to see if he’d gone mad, but that would have just complicated things. It’s not our place, I suppose.”

The Countess looked startled by this dismissal.

“Not our place? Danchmer, did you hear what they did to him? I did. I was curious so I sent Grauff to Hochdorf and he told me. They beat him until he was bloody and black and left him to die. That’s awful.”

The old knight sighed, rubbing his eye. “You sent Richomer? You shouldn’t have done that, it makes you look like you’re taking Wilhelm’s side.”

Anna was exasperated, motioning with her hands. “I certainly am!”

“It’s a private matter between Wilhelm and Robert.” Sir Danchmer explained, his voice slow but nonchalant as he crossed the room and took a seat beside her. “I consider Wilhelm to be my friend. I’ve worked beside him for at least… thirty years? Believe me, this pains me. Robin was… is a good lad, smart and quick with his words just like his father. But this happened to the Hochdorfs. It’s between them; it’s a family matter, we have no place to involve ourselves. I know you understand this.”

Frowning, Anna looked displeased but it was hard to dismiss what Danchmer had said. She knew he was right, and did all along. There was simply no legal right or ability for her to get involved, as what the Spaichingens did was against Wilhelm and his house. His son wasn’t a member of the court, and had no protections like his father. Still, there was a naive, hopeful part of Anna’s mind that had deluded itself into imagining Danchmer would arrive and find some meaning, some mechanism that allowed her to do something. Jürgen von Siedburg and Jan Reichart had come to a truce for the time being, but their feud had already unsettled the stability of the county. Now this had happened, and it was worse. She was concerned that the barons did not respect her and wished to push their powers as far as possible.

In this belief, Danchmer of course had to agree. Count Konrad was a stronger and more capable man, and threw himself into the midst of these feuds. Anna could have done this, but he did not personally believe she was capable of navigating the miasma that was politics in the realm.

A moment of silence fell between them. Another knock soon came on the door, and Anna Wallen rose again quickly to see who it was. After a moment, the herald Lach Hower stood in the doorway, one hand on his hip as he held his felt cap by his waist.

“Sir Isenbert has arrived.”

Danchmer looked surprised when the Countess rose to her feet and thanked the herald, sending him on his way.

“I didn’t know you were expecting someone?” He asked, a tinge of interest in his voice.

“Of course, I can’t just sit in Grafsburg and do nothing.” She said amicably. “Besides, you were away for a while. Why don’t you come along? I’ve been waiting for his arrival for a few days now.”

He relented and stood up, somewhat annoyed that his rest was interrupted so soon. The two of them walked down the halls of the apartments and rear rooms, headed towards the nave of the church. Anna’s servants remained in her room, cleaning up the leftover food and drinks.

Entering the main structure of the church, Danchmer identified the knight almost immediately, picking the nobleman out from the sea of churchmen tending to their daily business. He was of good stock and stood nearly a foot taller than most of them, and was dressed in fair clothing, though covered by a traveling cloak and tall rider’s boots.

The knight placed a hand on his chest, giving a small bow as the Countess approached him.

“I am honored to be in your presence, Your Ladyship.”

Danchmer immediately recognized his accent, which betrayed him as a southerner.

“The honor is mine.” Anna said respectfully. “An esteemed warrior such as yourself is a grace upon these halls.”

A second passed as Anna clasped her hands together and smiled, then gestured towards the private drawing rooms of the church, at the private apartments she just left.

“Please, come and sit with us.”

Just North of Lodwiksfeld

“Cur! Come here you bastard!”

The knight huffed out, snarling through a bushy, straw-colored mustache as he sat atop his steed. From where he stood on the road, Egmont Tigenshain was a clear and haughty sight. Dressed in the heraldry of house Hochdorf, his waffenrock ruffled slightly as he leaned forward, resting one armored gauntlet on his reins while the other pointed forward, towards his foe.

In the distance, just exiting from the middle of the town and passing through the alley of the local inn, was Wieland, a scion of the Spaichingens. He was startled by the sudden noise and stumbled back, then looking out to where Egmont rested, recognized the knight’s colors as that of Baron Wilhelm’s. Almost immediately a look of horror and disgust shot across his face, and looking at his horse tied up just near to the man, realized that he would never make it.

Egmont presented a cheeky grin, the knight nodding along as he smiled, then letting his free hand slump down towards his waist, rubbed across the sword fastened to his girdle. With his intention clear, Wieland broke out into a sprint almost immediately, rushing back behind the building and into the hamlet.

The knight cursed and quickly clamored down from his horse, drawing his blade and holding it up at his side as he took off at a jog after him.

“Come here!” He yelled out after him, turning the corner and seeing him fleeing up the dirt path towards the pond, near to the pigpens and tannery. “Stop running! Die with some dignity!”

Keeping after him, Egmont maintained a good pace, his distance constant with Wieland. Though the youth was faster on his feet, there was nowhere to go but towards the pond, which was flanked by a fenced path that had over years of farming been raised as an embankment. In wet months the path served as a watershed and slushed whatever filth and trash accumulated in the hamlet down towards the pond, but now it was frozen over, as was the water.

Looking back behind him, Wieland paused for a moment as he deliberated his choices. Trapped, he turned around before Egmont could reach him and dashed forward, scurrying onto the frozen pond’s surface as he ran. Egmont was fast behind him, but as the knight reached the edge of the pond, he pressed his foot against the surface and suddenly stopped. His face showed a look of uncertainty, and resting his sword by his side, looked angry and disappointed that the scum had escaped.

As Egmont was about to turn around, he watched as Wieland suddenly lost his footing on the frozen ground and slipped, sliding forward for a second. He fought to keep his balance before the combination of motion, coupled with the lack of friction, caused him to slam into the ground. In an instant the layer of ice shattered around him and he fell beneath the icy water; struggling to swim, he broke above the surface and tried to climb back onto the ice, but shattered more and more around him.

Calling out for help, he cried for mercy. The sounds of anguish, coupled with the commotion from earlier, had attracted a number of the peasants, who ventured down towards the pond to see for themselves. None dared to help Wieland, as they too feared the weak ice, or was it that Egmont, suddenly rejuvenated with the sight, turned his blade towards the serfs and dared any of them to step forward.

It was cold and chilly, and the water much more so. Wieland’s voice grew weaker and hoarser as he begged for forgiveness and mercy, but Egmont continued to watch on. Losing his strength, and unable to get his body above the layer of ice, the young man suddenly swooped down, falling beneath the water.

Waiting a moment, the knight saw that he did not rise and was satisfied with the knowledge. Throwing his sword back in its scabbard, he looked sternly at the peasants as he passed by, paying them little attention as he returned to his horse and prepared to depart immediately.

Grafsburg Church

“So, tell me, good Isenbert, when I inquired about your experience in the fighting, you told me that you were present in Creutzkirchen? I think that’s the name they chose?”

“Aye, that it is. Prince Kristian himself chose the name, since there was a little abbey called that just above the field where we fought.”

Sir Danchmer, the Countess and the knight all sat across from one another at a small table in the drawing room. Her maids had joined them, preparing a small meal for the knight, who Danchmer had learned was a man by the name of Isenbert von Volksam, who ventured from the south upon a request from the Countess. Anna had wanted to speak to a man that served in the campaign against the Syrdurians, as the battle had interested her. News of the Syrdurian army, and the war in general, had filtered slowly in Alvaringen since then. She was curious about how they both fought, and how the Syrds had presented themselves.

Admittedly, Danchmer found it somewhat unusual that Anna was interested in the war at all. He could tell that Sir Isenbert was as well, but the knight seemed honored by the idea of speaking to the Countess, and did not allow his own personal curiosities to upset that privilege.

“Can you tell me about the battle? Where you fought and what you did?” Anna asked politely, and the knight quickly obliged her as he took a drink from his cup.

“Of course. I was with the cavalry, under the Baron Rechimund, but he did not ride with us. He was sat on a hill just a ways from us, watching the development. Soon we were told to charge, and we did; across this open field, it was just under the abbey, and we struck the Syrd cavalry as it was out in the field.”

Anna listened intently as the knight continued his story, detailing the process of the battle. He gave a reasonable and truthful overview of what he saw, but spared many of the details of the gore and bloodshed, and the absolute ferocity that the Syrdish and Alvarish knights gave to one another in the melee. Eventually he came to the second charge, which routed the Syrdish force, and spoke about Prince Kristian’s flank, and the Hallish infantry from Korbek and Alvaringen that fought there for the high ground.

His description continued with some detail, but as he spoke about the early skirmishes and described the Syrdish attempt to prevent the vanguard from seizing the hill early, Anna made it clear she wanted to speak.

“Arquebusiers?” She asked, hoping that her intonation made it obvious enough she wanted him to elaborate.

“Matchlocks. The Syrds had them positioned in the front, along with some crossbowmen.”

“I’m somewhat familiar.” She reasoned. “In my father’s time they were not as common, but now you tell me the Syrdish army has a host of them?”

Isenbert nodded before explaining, “Well it was only a skirmishing group. Not that many. They were not that effective, since there was not many of them and I think the Syrds rushed them forward—hoped that we were too slow, I guess?”

Anna remained silent for a moment as she thought, and Isenbert took that as an excuse to continue eating. He was quite hungry from the trip, having spent little time resting since he did not want to keep the Countess waiting for long, lest she retract her offer.

“What if there were more of them?” She asked spontaneously, a thought entering her mind as she continued, “What if they had reached the hill in force, and had time to set up?”

Isenbert took a moment to respond, still finding it strange that a woman was asking such questions, but she had been a figure in this whole ordeal after all.

“I suppose then it would’ve been bloodier.” He admitted, uncertain. “They caused a lot of deaths as they did, more of them would’ve caused Prince Kristian and his soldiers trouble. I don’t know how the Baron would’ve responded.”

“Can I ask you a question?” Anna asked.

“Of course.”

“Say if the Syrdish mercenaries were a greater force. Say if the arquebusiers were three or four times as many, and they had been in a good field against you. How would they fare?”

Isenbert chuckled slightly.

“Well…” He started, “They’d be like archers. Out like that, we’d… we’d charge them and run ‘em out, I suppose.”

A thought crossed Anna’s face as she pursed her lips.

“And what if they held their fire and waited until the cavalry was right on top of them? What then?”

There was stillness as Sir Isenbert thought about her idea. He did not seem to know how to answer, but as he imagined it in his head, he slowly realized that he did not like the idea at all.

“It wouldn’t be good,” was all he could say.

Hochdorf Castle

The Chamberlain Wilhelm sat a silent vigil across from his son’s bed, saying nothing. He was white as a ghost and had not eaten well in the past few days, his mind on Robin’s health. They had found him bloodied and broken, and the peasants who came to help him said that he couldn’t stand or barely even spoke to them, except for to ask for water. Supposedly before he lost consciousness he called for his father, so they said.

Since then, he has slept. Every moment since he was brought back to his keep, Robin slept. He did not speak or even eat, and was unresponsive to every attempt or plea. Still, Wilhelm sat by his side dutifully, even sleeping in the chair as he watched and prayed.

The priest passed by him as he left the bed, having finished the rites. Looking up, he could see his son fully, and saw then at that moment that he drew no more breath.

A ragged sigh leaving Wilhelm’s throat, he dug his fingers into his palm, clenched into a tight fist.

Aelythium, Dhorvas, Syrduria, Ryeongse, and 2 othersEskeland, and Straulechen

Battle of Sarol part 1; A Night of Blood
Dhorvas Civil War phase 1
Development post
With Elvhenen

The Siege at Sarol

Argun swore, tearing up the message he had been delivered. He lashed out, kicking over a nearby table. Rocks bearing marks of various units and other materials scattered in the grass as though escaping his fury. The few guards stood by but none acted, unsure of how to respond to their commander’s rage.

“What is it?” demanded Alaqa.

Argun paused to glare at the green-scaled khemakh before reigning in his temper. “We received word of another force approaching. It is the Mergen.”

“Oghal finally stopped stewing in Turzhan?”, she asked rhetorically.

“Yes, and they are not far off. Scouts report they are making camp.”

“They cannot reach the other Siban though. We can keep them divided.”

“Their forces outnumber our own even without Dehqan and the rest of the Siban inside Sarol.” Argun said. “Our position here is vulnerable.”

“We could withdraw to the south.”

“That would only further divide us from Gera’s own forces. No, we need to redeploy to a more advantageous and secure position before Oghal can hit us.”

“They will try to stop such a movement if they see it.”

A few of the guards had picked up the scattered debris from Argun’s tantrum and had reset the table. Argun now added new stones to the map he had. “Their right flank is mostly elven mercenaries…” He moved a few stones around then called for paper. Another guard brought him a scroll and brush and Argun quickly scribbled off a message. “Send this to Gera immediately.”

Alaqa eyed her superior with doubt. “It will take them too long to get here.”

“Which means we need to delay things. Summon the others, I have some thoughts for that.”

Mergen Camp

The camp was filled with the noise of busy soldiers as they made preparations for the evening meals and set up defenses. Oghal had done her own survey of the camp before returning to her command tent. As expected, Arugn was vulnerable to her present position, though she had chosen to camp rather than begin a battle with little daylight left. If Argun remained in the morning, he would not remain for long.

“You are pacing”, said Tokur nearby. The khemakh was sitting on a stool, examining reports from their advance scouts. He wore his full lamellar armor. Oghal had chosen to bring him with their main force, she wanted his advice close by.She had left Juma in command at Turzhan. Though less experienced, he had learned under Tokur and was ready for the role.

“What of it?” Oghal asked.

“It suggests impatience.”

“I am ready to get this over with. This is a stop before dealing with Gera.”

“Ignore Gera for now, Argun is the one in front of you. Focus on him.”

Oghal sighed, though she knew he was right. She would have plenty of time later to focus on the dhorva band. Argun would have to be the focus for now. In that thought she realized she barely knew anything about her foe. She looked over to Tokur who was still examining messages. “What do you know about Argun?”

Tokur set aside the letter in his hand as he considered her question. After a moment's pause he sighed and gave a slight shrug. “Not a lot, now that I think about it. He is younger, never made suvemqan before this chaos. He was an arav, I know that at least but he is too young to have been a soldier during the unification wars. Nothing before the Samqar rebellion, certainly.”

“So he has not really done anything of note?”

“He successfully formed a rebellion within the Siban, enough to split it nearly in half. That is something. He did not succeed in that by being no one. I suppose it shows how much the larger council had begun to pay much less attention to what was going on in the bands beneath it. Or even between the bands.” Tokur said with a sigh. “No wonder we ended up in such a mess.”

Oghal did not comment but the words weighed on her mind. She had expected the various dhorva bands to rally to her when called. They had not. Tokur was right, there were plenty of reasons why things failed. And plenty of why she needed to put it back together.

A hand pulled open the flap that led into the command tent, the head of Commander Arasiel poking through. “May I enter?” He asked.

Oghal and Tokur both looked up at the movement by the tent flap. “You may.” Oghal said.

With a smile and a nod, Ariel moved through the tent flap, ducking his head to clear the top of the flap. His golden armor was now adorned with a shroud of dark colored fur, wrapping his shoulders and clearing the front of his body. “My troops have made camp around the rest of the Mergen and are assisting your troops in establishing a patrol roster. I’ve ordered them to sleep in their armor tonight as it saves on time and provides better warmth. Commander Navai has been a monumental help to our ease into the climate. He’s gone as far as securing me this cloak because…” He inhaled as he took a seat opposite of the two Khemakh. “Someone forgot to tell me how Goddess-damned cold the nights are here.” He said smiling.

“Well it is ovolis. I forget what the kostuan word for it is. Be glad the snows have not been harsh this year.” said Tokur. “We can provide more blankets if you need them. Normally we might have remained in Tuzhan until the season passed, but Sarol cannot wait.”

“Of course. We work at Oghal’s pleasure. As for the blankets, we don’t need them. You’ve all done plenty enough for us. My boys can handle it, by the end of it, maybe I won’t have to hear them cry about how hot it is anymore in Elvhenen. Anyway, I’ve got some of my troops helping around the camp with cooking, building tents, assisting in any way that they can. Regarding the plan, the two hundred crossbows and halberds I sent up north should be nice and cozy for the night. Any Siban that try to get word to Gera will be intercepted. Is there anything else I can do to assist, Raqan?”

“Dayan should already be north as well, so we should be well covered now,” said Oghal. “As for tonight, just keep your men alert but rested. I intend to force the matter with Argun in the morning. And thank you for your efforts.” she added.

Arasiel nodded. “Of course, Raqan. It’s what we’re paid to do. We intend to do our jobs very well. There’s a beauty in the country that I’ve not seen in Elvhenen, or even in the Eternals before we migrated. The cold bites, yes, but it’s nice. I’ve seen enough war and battle for one elf’s life.” He ended, chuckling before adding another part. “Might even hand the reins of the company to my second in command and retire here. Once the war’s over, of course. Anyway, I’m blabbering on.” Arasiel said, standing up from his seat. “I’ll dish out some last minute orders and retire to my tent. Catch a bit of sleep before an event-filled day tomorrow.” Arasiel said as he began walking away.

“It is too soon to think of retirement just yet,” said Oghal with a laugh. “But yes, maybe after the war. Rest well and we will savor the victory we will earn tomorrow.”

Commander Arasiel, stopping at the ten flap just before opening it, turned and smiled at the Khemakh. “Been fighting all my life. First in the Eternals for my Clan, then in the deserts for my country against the locals, then against those damned creatures of the sea in Qirinai, now in Dhorvas. Running a company like this just to make some extra money for my old age to spend on some children of my own. If I make it through tomorrow and this war, I’ll take it as a sign. Anyway, do try and get some sleep, Raqan. And of course you too, Tokur.” He ended with a nod of his head and slipped through the flap, out into the whistling wind and commotion of voices.

After Arasiel had left the tent a few moments passed in silence between Oghal and Tokur before the latter finally spoke up. “Even I am not sure I want to retire here,” he said. Oghal arched the ridge above her eye as she looked at Tokur who smirked in return.

“Well he is right, I should get some rest. As should you once you have made sure the camp is set.”

“I will.”, Tokur said as he rose from his stool. “Until the morning, Raqan.” He gave a salute, striking his chest with a closed fist before turning and exiting the tent. Oghal remained alone for a time with her thoughts of the coming day and the battles ahead before finally shaking her head and taking the advice about rest.

A Night of Blood

The air was quiet but for the occasional sound of the soft snow crunching here and there as Yamir and his soldiers moved slowly closer to the Mergen encampment. Though he felt himself wince when they made sounds in the snow, they were aided by the darkness of the night. The moon could not be seen through the dense clouds above that still sprinkled the powder over their heads. Even with the help their advance was slow. They also had to be careful of the snow covered brush within the forest of pines they were crossing. They did not want to take the chance of being spotted prematurely.

They also could not begin too quickly, as the point was to allow Argun to redeploy their forces. While Yamir hit their camp in a raid, Argun would move their main force across the river Ahmu, aiming to flank the elven troops with the Mergen who they figured would react more slowly. They were mercenaries, afterall. Yamir doubted they would hold their position long, preferring to regroup with the mergen.

A loud series of crunching noises like quick paced footsteps in the snow brought Yamir’s eyes to focus near the camp entrance they were closest to. The dark worked against his own force as much as it did the Mergen, and it was difficult to judge the direction of some sounds in the dense night air. He could barely make out a guard moving along the edge of the tree line. The mergen soldier seemed oblivious to the noise they were making, perhaps focused only on moving quickly to finish their patrol.

Yamir raised his left arm, signaling one of the soldiers with him to move forward and deal with the careless guard. A gray-scaled khemak stepped forth slowly and cautiously until they reached the guard who was now standing idly and looking toward the tree line in the opposite direction. Yamir barely saw the quick movement as his soldier drew a knife and muffled the guards mouth before cutting their throat. They gently lowered the body to the snow that was quickly stained with red.

It would not be long before the others came looking for the guard that now lay dead. The wait was over. Yamir drew his sword and behind him the trees echoed with the sound of more weapons being drawn. “Quietly, until we breach the gate.” he whispered to those around him and the order was relayed back to those who could not hear him. Yamir then began to move toward the Mergen cmap. Slowly at first, then his pace began to quicken as they neared. A pair of guards came into view, preparing to move out into the open, when they spotted them. Yamir’s sword silenced the throat of the right guard before they could emit a sound. The guard to the left was dispatched just as quickly by another of his troops.

It had mattered little, as a number of Mergen were awake and on watch not far from the entrance and witnessed the swift killing of their allies. The alarm was sounded. Yamir raised his sword and let out a fierce, echoing roar and his troops followed his example as they began to pour into the camp. The killing began in earnest.

***
Oghal was awoken with a start as the alarm of the drums echoed through the camp and into her tent. She scrambled from her bed and moved to armor herself. Tokur arrived just as she was finishing the last strap on her bracers. “How many?” she asked.

“We do not know yet, but they seem to have struck at different ends of the camp, no doubt to try and spread us out and to stir as much chaos as they can.” Tokur replied. He was fully armored and Oghal wondered if he had even taken it off.

“Then let us find out.”, she said as she finished her armor and collected her sword and bow.

They made their way toward the south entrance of the camp where the chaos was loudest. Oghal quickly found Gulyar organizing the defense there. A small group of raiders had been pinned near the camp palisade by a line of mergan spears who were picking the intruders off. Oghal fell beside Gulyar who only glanced over to acknowledge her arrival.

“We are holding?” Oghal asked of Gulyar.

“Yes. There do not seem to be many. They scattered once inside to try and disperse us. I sent Reyhan to pursue them.”

“They may try to start fires.” Tokur said.

“Then let us kill them before they can do much more.” Oghal said and she pressed forward into the fight. Gulyar and Tokur followed close at her side.

***

At the sounds of clashing steel, screaming and bells tolling, Commander Arasiel jolted awake so violently that he pushed himself away from the bedding atop the wooden framing, knocking over the small bedside table that held a cup of water and a small candle, extinguishing the flame with the spilled contents in the chaos of the awakening mercenary. He quickly arose to see Marshal Elrie Mirakis, visibly struggling to breath, his sword coated with crimson. “Khemakh are attacking our camp. It’s unclear who they are but most likely Siban.” Said Elrie, moving through the flap of his tent and into it, turning to face the entrance while the Commander tied his sword belt to his waist over his armor. “How many?” Asked Arasiel.

“Unclear, sir. I was on overwatch with some of our men on the west side when they stormed in, completely taking the Mergen guards by surprise. Fought through near a dozen just to get to you.”

Finishing his equipment check, he drew his own sword, a curved blade that had been etched with High Elvish text. “We must find the Raqan, without her this all goes to hell. I’ll find her, you need to find Commander Navai and muster our cavalry. Do it now!” Shouted Arasiel as Elrie pulled open the curtain to reveal a scene of chaos. Along the lines of neatly made tents of various colors that belonged to the Sons of the Sunflower mercenary company were elves viciously clashing steel with Khemakh, stumbling over the bodies of the fallen as a fire had begun to engulf several of the tents many rows down. Near them was an Elven warrior, young in age and bald of hair, fallen to his knees with a Dhorvasi blade dug deep into his spine, a look of fear in his eyes as the Khemakh warrior stood above, basking in the blood. Arasiel looked over to Elrie. “Gather what warriors you can and push these bastards out of our camp.” The Marshal nodded and moved to confront the Siban who had ended the poor elf’s life.

Arasiel began to turn the other way, seeing a group of elves walking towards him, recently dispatching a section of enemies from ahead. “You all, come with me! We move to secure the Raqan.” The five of them all gave various confirming responses and moved to surround the Commander as they took off in a heightened speed towards the Raqan’s command tent.

On their way to the camp, the fighting that once had been fierce was now dulling down as remaining Siban forces either pulled back from their overreached positions to the outer edges of the camps or were slaughtered or in the process of being slaughtered by superior numbers. Commander Arasiel and his group, which had grown in number to twenty-four had now approached the highly defended position the Raqan was now at.

“Raqan Oghal, are you alright?”

Oghal turned at the calling of her name and title. She noted the elven commander and nodded in acknowledgement. “I am fine. The enemy is not.”, she added and a cheer went up around her. Bodies lay strewn around them, but most were among the raiders. “They seemed to have either underestimated our numbers.”

“Or had another purpose”, added Tokur who came to stand beside the raqan.

“Regardless, I’ve sent the Marshal to gather our portion of the Mergen cavalry and I’m beginning the mobilization. With your approval, I would like to take a portion of my forces here north to get eyes on Argun’s forces as well as begin our attack. I am of the same mind as Tokur. They knew what it would take to destroy the Mergen and this force was not a quarter of what is needed for it. I plan to find out. Do I have your permission, Raqan?” Asked the Commander.

“How long before light?”, she asked Tokur.

“It was the fifth drum of the morning watch.” Tokur said. He glanced upward looking toward the dark sky. “I’d say two, no more than three drums from now. Not long.”

“As good a time to begin as any then,” said Oghal. Sure turned back to Arasiel. “Take your force, see what Argun is up to while we get the main force ready and moving. We will rendezvous nearer Sarol.”

With the approval given, Commander Arasiel nodded and turned to march back to the Elven camps. “All of you, gather as many troops together as you can. I don’t see us sleeping much anymore tonight.” He said, with many of the soldiers around him dispersing to their respective quarters to notify the others. Four stayed with Arasiel to ensure there’d be no surprise attack from a Siban that was missed in the sweeping actions the elves and khemakh were doing through their camps. A short and fast walk led the Commander to Marshal Mirakis and Commander Navai. “Commander Navai, we’re moving out. Is the cavalry ready for support?”

Navai gave the usual khemakh salute, striking his chest with a closed fist. “THey are mobilized and ready.”

Commander Arasiel nodded to the Khemakh. “Have them deployed immediately to the north. Find any Siban attempting to flee and end them. Elrie, our troops?”

“Still gathering, Commander, although it shouldn’t be much longer. Sleeping in their armor as well as the rush of adrenaline this fine morning has given our boys quite the pep in their step.”

“Get them moving quicker. We don’t have the luxury to wait any further. We must stay in close proximity to the cavalry. They know this land better than anyone. I don’t want us getting lost in enemy territory.” The Marshal nodded and saluted the Commander, departing the group with Navai doing the same for his own khemakh mounted warriors.

Elvhenen, Ryeongse, and Eskeland

Elvhenen

The Battle of Sarol Part 2 - The Skirmish on the River Ahmu
Dhorvas Civil War
Development Post
With Dhorvas

“Quiet!” barked Argun as a passing group of soldiers fumbled with a wagon. It had not been secured properly and supplies had spilled out with a loud ruckus. While they were a ways off from the Mergen, he did not want to chance that the sounds might carry on the heavy winter air. Hopefully the mergen camp was too distracted.

He had sent Yamur with a small force to sow chaos and disrupt the mergen camp. If they could deal a blow, perhaps even kill Oghal herself, it would be a boon to his position here. It was unlikely though. At the very least he hoped they would put the mergen some amount of disarray, allowing him to move his own forces across the river and seek out a more defensible position until help arrived. He had sent messengers to Gera, advising her of the situation. If she could bring the dhorva band down from the north behind the mergen, then they might be able to defeat them.

For now he was on the defensive. Defending from his original camp was untenable, he would have been pinned between Sarol and the mergen. His aim was the hills beyond the city. There he would dig in and try to weather the enemy. If they were not enough, he could still retreat toward the base of the Barrier Mountains.

He had chosen to cross the Ahmu river, the western sibling to the Orda,and the second of the pair of rivers that passed parallel to Sarol. The elven mercenaries were closer to the west and he had hoped that they might not move as quickly to stop him. They were mercenaries after all, their motivation was less than Oghal’s own goals.

The line of troops was growing ahead. The army had stopped. Argun pushed down the irritation that was swelling and moved forward to the river to see what was holding up their advance. Once he had passed through the growing cluster he found Qorai along the bank. “What is the hold up?” he demanded.

“Too thin.” replied Qorai. “We cannot cross here, not quickly enough anyway. We will have to look further down the river.”

Argun could feel the irritation returning.”Curse the spirit of the Ahmu. Very well, let us move quickly. The light is growing. Sahnra nearly has the sun high enough to shed light on our movements.”

Qorai nodded and began ordering troops to move along the river, seeking a better place to cross. The throng began to move and Argun reminded them to keep quiet. He hoped they could cross be for daybreak was officially upon them. When the mergen moved on his camp outside Sarol, he would be well into building defenses in the hills past the city.
***

The elven mercenaries had departed the camp an hour after the bloody encounter with Siban forces, determined to investigate Argun’s plans for the coming battle that was bound by fate to happen. Normally, mercenaries, regardless of allegiance, moved only when ordered to by their employer. The Sons of the Sunflower were different. Not only did they give loyalty to their employers but held honor above all. This included the powerful will and determination to take the initiative for their payer, such as to mobilize their forces to meet their foe face to face and to throw any plans they had of advancing on them or to establish a more defensible position into the flames.

With around eight hundred soldiers, Commander Arasiel formed his legion into columns of four-hundred, with the Pikemen leading in the vanguard. Behind them were the halberdiers and following them, the Longbowmen and Crossbowmen. Shoring up the flank were Commander Arasiel, Marshal Elrie and Commander Navai with a contingent of soldiers that acted as a bodyguard. Departing from the west flank of the Raqan’s camp, Commander Arasiel ordered a sweeping maneuver across the countryside until they’d reached the eastern bank of the Ahmu River, frozen solid. From there, the elves continued their march, keeping their left shoulders to the ice.

During this slow march northward, the light cavalry belonging to the Mergen were kept at a distance, flanking the main elven force on their right side and continuing their primary objective of hunting down any of Argun’s forward scouts or survivors from the raid. Arasiel’s hope would have been that following the river would lead them to the outskirts of Argun’s siege lines around Sarol, where he’d halt his forces, using this valuable time before Raqan Oghal’s main force could arrive to establish a battle plan or if need be, push forward if spotted and disrupt all efforts of establishing a unified defense on Argun’s part. As a shock to all, none of this would transpire as horns across the vanguards of both armies began to shriek as they would very nearly run right into one another.

***

Argun’s heart sank as the sound of horns erupted, shattering the eerie quiet that had dominated their movement. It couldn’t be the Mergen already, it was surely scouts. What fool sounded the alarm so fiercely over scouts, against his direct orders, would soon feel his wrath. The sound of the horns likely would carry across to both sarol and the mergen, they had to move more quickly. Argun kicked his horse and urged it forward as a gallop to reach the front of the columns.

Upon nearing the front, Argun found Qorai. This time he did not stifle the irritation he felt when he spoke. “Were my orders not clear?” Argun said almost in a growl. “Everyone around may know where to find us now!”

“They likely have already!” Qorai bit back. He glared at Argun before gesturing forward. “It is not scouts, we have run into mergen cavalry. They have begun targeting our flank with volleys, trying to pin us against the river.”

Argun instinctively looked in the direction of Qorai’s gesture. The light was great enough now and as he strained his eyes he could make out a few cavalry firing another volley toward the troops at the head of his lines. His own forces were returning with their own volley but the enemy was much faster on horse. Argun gave a resigned sigh.

“Shift the front column to face the cavalry with a proper defense. I will bring the others around so we can try to hit them from their flank as they attack. We need to deal with this quickly before reinforcements arrive.” Qorai acknowledged his order and moved off while Argun turned to organize the rest of his force. A skirmish here was not what he needed, but he could not cross with the enemy at his back.

***

At the sight of the enemy’s main formations facing right at their front, this scenario had truly taken the Elf’s breath away. He was now going to face a majority of Argun’s force with reinforcements from the rest of the Mergen, possibly much later. He would need to quickly and efficiently form his force into a hammer, with Argun’s vanguard to be the nail head. Arasiel understood that total defeat of the enemy’s force was nearly impossible and therefore would need to at least force them to either hold position or move the enemy’s force back. He was also surprised by the speed and ferocity the Mergen cavalry had begun their attack on Argun’s right flank, despite Commander Arasiel’s approval of such an attack. He couldn’t ponder it, mainly because they were not officially under his command and acted more as an equal on the battlefield.

“Marshal Elrie! Push the second column into the Pikes! Form the pikes around the Halberds! Push the Longbowmen up as close to their flank as possible, they will hold fire until I give the command!” The Commander yelled as his columns continued moving forward. As the orders were given, the solid lines of the formation began to dissolve as the forwardmost column morphed, expanding their zone as the second melded into them, forming a larger force. Because of the size of the formation now, it moved slower in order to keep its form and order but lowered their pikes to chest and head height as they placed one foot after the other, closing the distance between the frontline Siban ranks and of the elves’ spearheads.

As the elves continued to close the distance, Commander Arasiel was utterly flabbergasted by the sight of the Siban lines shifting, moving to face the Mergen cavalry instead of the elven frontline. It was possible that, due to the lack of good lighting from the early sun’s newborn rays, Argun’s force simply hadn’t seen them yet and with their flank now kindly faced towards them, this was a golden moment in warfare, the moment to gain an important advantage that just may set this entire operation in Arasiel’s favor. This brought on a sheer determination that nearly caused the Commander to fall from his horse as he turned to one of the captains placed in charge of his bodyguard’s unit.

“Kanil! Get to Commander Navai! Tell him to pull his horses back now, do it now!” Without a nod or salute, the elven officer charged away, spurring his horse to take him as fast as he could to the lines of the cavalry that continued to harass the siban. Arasiel turned back to Elrie. “Marshal, all forward! Quickly, now!” He said as he pulled his curved blade from its sheath and held it high in the air. “Move in on them now!” He shouted again.

The order had been given through the ranks of the captains down to the hardy soldiers of blade and formation, quickening their pace at the cost of a perfect frontline shape, with an almost wave-like appearance taking its place. By the time the right flank of the Siban noticed the incoming charge of pikes and repositioned their own spears and shields, it was too late as the long weapons shoved their way through the front line of the right flank, continuing to push as shouts of commanding men and screams of dying men filled the air. For the moment, the square remained closed, and the formation instead continued the push with pikes and maintained a cohesive shape. Commander Arasiel commanded his horse forward, driving his heels into its sides, dashing forward towards the lines of Longbowmen. “Archers!” He screamed and the elves with bow and arrow responded by stamping the end of their bow into the ground. “Fire forward past our own lines and into the ranks of their second column! Litter the ground with arrows and bodies! Nock! Draw! Fire!” He shouted, allowing a few seconds before each command and the last order was rewarded with the sounds of hundreds of arrows launching off from their bows and into the air.

***

“Ignore the cavalry, turn! Turn to the elves!” shouted Qorai over the scene of chaos. They had been completely taken by surprise by the elven assault on their line from along the riverside. It seemed this was not just a scouting group. “Push them back! Send the elv..” an arrow struck Qoari’s horse as the words were still spilling from his mouth and his mount tumbled forward. He instinctively rolled off to escape being crushed by his own horse. He drew his sword as he came up. A soldier approached and he quickly resumed bellowing orders. “Send word for the other columns, the rear can deal with the mergen archers, the second needs to form with us and counter the elven attack!” With a quick nod the soldier ran off to relay Qoar’s command. Qoarai himself moved toward the center of the first column, trying to reorganize the mess that had become of their lines.

***
Commander Arasiel skirted the lines behind the archers, keeping his eyes on the formations beyond his own and as he did so, he continued to yell out at his troops to keep marching, keep pushing, keep driving their pikes into the Siban and as they did, the Longbowmen continued launching volley after volley with their distances varying from the middle of the first column to the frontline units of the second. As he watched, he kept in mind the cavalry forces that had pulled back and were now waiting idle for additional orders, watching as the Elven troops pushed deeper into the Siban flank. With each step, the pikes pushed forward either into empty space or into a khemakh’s gut or shield. When he planned to open the pike square to unleash the melee units that would engage the khemakh in brutal fighting, he would move the cavalry back into the Siban’s troops. By the time Kanil had arrived from delivering the message, he was to be sent back out to Commander Navai ordering them back to the front. Concurrently, Arasiel gave the orders to Marshal Elrie to open the square.

Minutes after the Commander had given the order, the front ranks of the square began to shift, with both sides expanding outwards to allow a considerable gap which was soon filled with the screams of Halberdiers and Swordsmen, rushing out and clashing steel with the khemakh. As Arasiel’s main melee units rushed out of the protective layer of pikes, the pikemen shifted backwards, allowing enough room to reform their lines back into the solid pike square and shifted east to support the Halberdiers’ right flank. As the arrow volleys would stop to avoid friendly casualties, Arasiel would hope that the cavalry would arrive in time to support the attack.

***

The situation was only growing worse for Qorai and his soldiers. The enemy formation had opened and now halberds and regulars streamed into the fray, adding to the punishing force that was now entangled with Qorai’s unit. An elven spear erupted from the mass of foes, aimed for his gut. Qorai deflected it with his sword before bringing the blade back, allowing his foe’s momentum to cut their throat across the edge. The elf fell, but there were many more to take their place. In that moment the Mergen cavalry returned, adding to the weight of his enemy’s assault. What semblance of a defense he had managed to hold together evaporated before his eyes. Soon his troops were beginning to turn to flee. Qorai tried in vain to hold the formation. ***

As the frontline ranks of the Siban began to crumble into disarray, there was nothing to halt the surge of Elven halberdiers and swordsmen from pressing forward, to the point that they were beginning to move further ahead of the pikemen to their right, the soldiers seeing red and taking part in the slaughter of troops as they begun to run away. This was also true in the case of Captain Alwin Tsukarus, a man of the commanding echelon of the second battalion, one of the units that formed the bulk of the halberdier square. Rather than enforce a structured and disciplined response to the sight of the enemy running, he also joined in the chasing down and ending of khemakh. When he’d seen what looked to be a commanding element of the enemy’s force, the young elf of barely thirty-five years of age took his chance and charged. He remained quiet, focusing on his breathing as he ran, passing by a dozen of his own troops engaged in their own combat with the Siban stragglers and as he closed the distance, he swung his sword towards the commander, hoping to end him.

It was almost unfair, how easy the kill was, the Captain remarked. The older Khemakh had been so busy trying to fill some semblance of courage back into his men and rally them around him for a staunch defense that he had completely shirked any form of situational awareness to the fact that he was now at the edge of his cowardly formation’s edge and quickly losing ground. He had brought the sword down across his back, cutting through whatever armor and clothing was there which released a guttural shriek from the commander as it pushed him down to the ground. The Captain had stopped his run and watched the commander fall, blood pouring from the gash across his back. Alwin Tsukarus, panting as adrenaline coursed through his veins, walked back to the Siban and kicked him over onto his back. He turned the sword backwards into his hands and brought its tip down onto the Siban’s chest with all of the force he could muster. The light soon faded from the Qorai’s eyes and Alwin could not help but to stare into them the entire time and watch.

***

Argun watched with apprehension as the mergen cavalry rejoined the elves, slamming into the front units with devastating effect. It did not take long before the lines, what remained of them, crumbled and began to flee. Their enemy gave chase and the slaughter began with abandon. This was not how it was supposed to go. How did the elves outmaneuver them so quickly?

“Sound the retreat. We will withdraw back to the main camp and make our defense there.” he said to the officers around him.

“We can still push them back.” Alaqa protested. “Send in the rest of the units and our numbers will force them away.”

“Or we can simply cross here.” added Milun from his right. Argun could see the concern he felt mirrored on the youngest of his officers.

“By which time the rest of Oghal’s force will arrive and destroy us in detail.” he said toward Alaqa. He turned to Milun next. “No, our main goal has been lost here. Forcing a crossing now would only add to the slaughter with the enemy at our back. Those out on the river would freeze where they fell in, or be picked one by one from the elven archers.”

A horn sounded, signaling the retreat. Argun felt sick at its note. “We will redouble our defenses at the camp and make a stand. Perhaps we can hold until Gera arrives with reinforcements.” he added, trying to convince himself as much as those around him.

***

As organized fighting relented into small skirmishes with straggling bands of khemakh cut off from their main units, Commander Arasiel and Marshal Elrie rode across the lines, reforming the discipline of the soldiers of fortune and calling back in the overextended groups of soldiers, which had become more difficult as morale continued to rise. Cheers broke out among the ranks of the lines and Marshal Elrie congratulated the Commander.

“It’s far from over, Marshal. Get our troops in marching formation and hold them.” He turned to another soldier from his bodyguard unit. “Deliver the news to the Raqan.”

The Battle of Sarol Part 3 - Argun's End

The morning sun was bright and clear when Oghal’s main force began arraying just south of Argun and the rebel siban. Word had reached her of the triumph of the elves under Arasiel earlier in the morning, blocking Argun’s attempted withdrawal toward the barrier mountains. The elves had saved them a great deal of annoyance. Argun had nowhere left to run.

“Arasiel has proven quite the asset to our force.” she said. Tokur and Gulyar stood at her side as the three watched their enemy’s movements in the short distance.

“And you were unsure of it at first.” Tokur said with a slight laugh in his tone. “They have turned the balance in our favor. Gera will fare a little better, I think. But that is for later.” He added.

“Why don’t they surrender?” asked Sabri as she arrived to join the three. Bogun and Khoja soon followed.

“Because he likely knows Dehqan will hang his corpse as an example,” said Bogun.

“Deservedly so.” agreed Khoja.

As the main Mergen force arrived at the rear of the elves, Commander Arasiel and Marshal Mirakis were the first to greet them on the outskirts of the elven lines with a small group of guardsmen escorting them. “Raqan Oghal, it’s good that you’ve arrived.” He paused as a harsh wind blew right into his face, causing his eyes to squint and his pale face to become even paler from the cold. “The battle was challenging, but we’ve gotten the upper hand on these rebel dogs. I’ve got my men and the mergen cavalry spread out to keep an eye on the camp but close enough to form should they launch a counter-attack.” Said Arasiel.

“Very good, Arasiel. Your forces and yourself have performed admirably in this campaign.” she said. “I look forward to seeing how far we'll go together.”

“Are your forces ready to begin again so soon or should we move them to reserve for the beginning?” asked Tokur.

“This morning was merely an exercise routine. We will do what we’ve been paid to do, sir. Put us wherever you need us.” replied Arasiel.

Oghal gave a nod and Tokur continued. “Very well then. The elves and yourself will maintain your present deployment. Our own infantry will deploy to your right, filling in the distance between here and the Orda river. Our cavalry under Aisan will position with Navai to your left, covering the land between yourself and the Ahmu. Aisan will be in charge of the combined cavalry. You will command your elves of course, and the overall left. Oghal and I will be positioned in the center where the elves and mergen forces meet. Bogun will command the right with Khoja as second.” As he spoke, he gestured in various directions. “We have sent couriers to Sarol, encouraging Dehqan to come out with his own force, blocking any northward retreat by Argun. As our force advances, the wings will spread out, forming a crescent moon to properly encircle the rebels. Any questions?”

Commander Arasiel thought for a moment, turning his head to visualize a bit of what the battle plan would come to look like. When thoroughly satisfied, he turned back and nodded. “No questions.”

When no one else had any either, Oghal gave a nod to Tokur, who saluted. “Then prepare your units. We will begin the attack once all of you are in place.” The other officers then saluted and took their leave.

***

Bogun waited for the start of the action, he was eager for the fight and was unhappy he had missed the skirmish along the Ahmu. The elves had had their share of glory, it was time for his own. Khoja was beside him and appeared far less impatient. It annoyed Bogun a little. “Not interested in this battle?” he asked his ally.

“No less than the next. I just lack your bloodlust.” Khoja replied.

“How boring.”

“This is a small stone anyway, Gera will be more of a fight.”

Bogun wouldn’t argue that. He wondered just how much fight Argun had left in him after his defeat to the elves at the river. He was now surrounded on all sides. They say cornered prey will strike, but that doesn’t mean it can put up much of a fight.

The drums began toward the center. The signal to begin. “Well, let’s see what he has left.” Bogun remarked. “Begin the advance, Khoja.”

His less excited friend saluted and moved forward to begin the attack and move their flank up to block the path along the Orda river. He could see the center already in movement. They would soon see what fight Argun still had.

***

In the lull that had been established from waiting for the Mergen lines to form and for battle preparations to come to a close, Commander Arasiel returned to his formations and took the time to organize his men and give them rest. In that time, he took the liberty of sending a small group of his own guardsmen fitted with horses to ride from the main mercenary group, up to the Mergen cavalry’s position and continued north, towards the walls of Sarol, where’d they remain to monitor any attempts to send scouts north or to send another group of messengers to the only route that would require more effort on the Mergen and elven companies to intercept, unknowing of the ambush that was established further north along the roads. It was then that the moment of peace had ended and the drums began to beat. With their orders clear, Commander Arasiel gave the order. The Pikemen and Halberdiers were the first to begin their forward march, with the longbowmen remaining behind in the hills, where they would soon be given the order to unleash their volleys. To better secure his command of the left wing, Commander Arasiel moved to the east, positioning himself behind the left flank of his elves and the right flank of the Mergen cavalry.

***

Dehqan could barely suppress the smile that spread across his jaws as he watched the melee begin between the Mergen and the rebels. Argun would pay for his betrayal. It did not fully ease the embarrassment he had faced, being holed up in his own city for most of the winter. It would satisfy his anger for now until they could move against the dhorva band.

“Finally, we put this to an end.” said Sargun, sitting upon his own horse to Dehqan’s right. Tuyaara was to his left. It was largely due to these two experienced commanders that he had been able to hold the siege for so long.

“Yes,” said Dehqan. “I want Argun alive if possible,” he added.

“That may depend on what he chooses to do.” replied Tuyaara.

“Death is still good.” Dehqan replied.

“They are heavily engaged with the mergen now. Shall I lead our forces forward?” Sargun asked.

Dehqan gave a nod and Sargun pushed his horse forward to command the charge. The mass of loyal siban troops began to move forward slowly at first. As their flanks caught pace with the center their march developed into a full charge. Dehqan watched as the back lines fired volleys toward the defenders before the front lines reached the first of the intermittent palisades. From that point on, it all became a blur of bodies as the melee and carnage began in full.

***

Alaqa nearly toppled over as she dodged a spear point that just narrowly missed grazing her ribs. The khemakh gripping the polearm gave a grow as they tried to pull back for another strike. Alaqa had other ideas as she grabbed the haft and pulled it forward. The soldier had a tight enough grip that the force of the pull dragged him forward, bringing her foe in striking range. She thrust her sword forward, piercing the lamellar armor and skewering her enemy. They fell without a cry.

She picked up the spear and threw it into another adversary as they moved to attack her. An ally fell toward her right, knocked back several feet. She turned and found herself face to face with Sargun. The larger khemakh immediately charged her and she instinctively rolled to her side to avoid him. His battleax struck only air where she had been a moment before. Alaqa quickly moved to try and stab for Sargun’s side but he was faster. When he had missed her in the first strike, he simply swung it back like a club to catch her in her counter attack. The force knocked her over and she landed with a thud. Sargun then kicked her hard in the ribs and sent her rolling. The pain roared inside her as she forced herself up. Sargun came forth for another strike and she lunged with her sword. She hit nothing. Sargun had grabbed her arm before her blade could hit. Her eyes met his for a brief moment, seeing the grinning snarl along his face before his axe came down, cleaving through her armor and into her shoulder with great force. The pain was just as brief.

***
The elves bearing swords and halberdiers were the first column to reach the outskirts of the eastern camp sections, waiting for them were a force of rebel Siban behind a field of wooden fortifications designed to establish chokepoints and with them they would do the utmost damage to the elves. From their built-up positions, the first two lines of the Siban archers unleashed volley after volley, coming down upon the elves with terrible success. Dozens of elven warriors fell with each arrow storm that crashed into their sea of bodies. Rushing through the chokepoints, stumbling over the mass of dead or dying elves crying out in pain, they breached through the first layer, slamming their blades into the enemy that had been waiting for them. Sounds of clashing steel, shouting and screams of the dying filled the air around the eastern front and for every rebel Siban that had died, two elves died with him or her. The ferocity of Argun’s men were out-matching that of the soldiers of fortune and it was true to form that a cornered animal will always give everything it has to survive another day. Despite the casualties mounting, the elves continued pushing inward, breaking through the first line in a little under half an hour, forcing the Siban back step by step. The initial attack was severely against the elves but as their established defensive positions began to crumble, the numerical advantage was becoming more clear to the Siban and that same wall of courage and bravery was now eroding.

Commander Arasiel, watching the battle from afar, could see in detail how his mercenaries were fighting. They maintained their formations up until the breakthrough of the first line of defense the Siban had maintained. Once they funneled through the choke points at the cost of many deaths, any semblance of organization had no choice but to fade away. Close quarters fighting had developed within the camp as elves pushed further in. With strict orders, he had ordered the Mergen cavalry to continue to hold their position, despite anger from Commanders Navai and Aisen and their urge to see battle. Regardless, the elven commander ordered them to hold. If any attempt to retreat would come, the Mergen cavalry would stop it. Arasiel was skeptical of any sort of break out from the now worsening encirclement around Argun’s camp but should one materialize, they would get their taste for more blood.

***

The battle was lost as quickly as it began. No, thought Argun, it had already been lost when they had failed to cross the river Ahmu. When he was forced to retreat to his camp, he had known there was no winning the coming battle. Any hope of holding out until Gera arrived with reinforcements was in vain. They were beset from all sides. There was no escape now.

How had it gone so wrong so quickly? Mere weeks ago he was besieging the city of Sarol while Oghal sat in Turzhan, too afraid to push out. The siege had taken longer than he had hoped. The more veteran commanders of the Siban had stayed loyal to Dehqan and had proven difficult to dislodge from their defense. He had focused on keeping them isolated.

It was the elves, he decided. Their arrival had made Oghal bolder. It was they who had blocked his plan earlier in the morning. Mercenaries who were more active in their role than he expected. Sahnra condemn them! He might be secure against the barrier mountains if not for them.

“Argun!” came a shout and Argun was awoken from his internal daze. Milun came rushing toward him. She shouted his name again as though uncertain he had heard it before.

“What?” he asked? His tone betrayed his weariness and decimated spirit.

“We can’t hold them anymore. They are hammering us on all sides. They’ll simply kill us to the last at this rate.”

“Kill us to the last…” he softly echoed her words.

“We need to surrender. They might spare us.”

Argun felt the anger rise, pushing back at the despondency that had preceded it. Surrender? To be spared? Argun knew there was little chance of Dehqan sparing him. At best he expected to be made an example of before his execution. Surrender for him was just a slower pace to death.

Death. The word hung on his mind. Was he really about to die here? Was there no chance of surviving? He still had some of his cavalry close. He had thought to send them out to flank the mergen along the Orda before Dehqan had brought his troops out from Sarol to close the circle on him.

“Rally our cavalry,” he said to Milun. She stared at him, visibly confused and unsure what he was planning to do with a few hundred cavalry against an encircled army. She then moved to obey his order.

Argun was ready on his own horse when the rest of his cavalry finally formed with him, Milun toward the front. His gaze wandered among them. A moment of pride at how they had chosen to support him in siding with the dhorva band. A moment of shame in how things had unraveled so quickly.

“Loyal friends,” he said aloud. “The enemy encircles us, but at the cost of thinning their lines.Charge with me once more. We will hit their center. We will either eliminate Oghal, or we will push through and escape. Gera lies to the north and may yet render us aid. To stay here is only death. Forward might be life yet.”

A series of salutes arose from the cavalry. Even as he spoke, Argun found himself more hopeful. If they could only break through and reach gera, they might have their lives. Perhaps there was a chance. He raised his own sword high as he turned to face their enemy. A moment passed but it felt like an eternity to Argun. He brought his sword down, pointing forward, and they began to charge.

***

Oghal watched as a rebel cavalry broke from their camp and charged straight for her position. It at once seemed both brave and foolish to her. It might have inspired her when she was younger. Tokur was already moving their troops to counter, and a spear wall was already poised for the inevitable clash. The elven archers had already dwindled their number before they struck Tokur’s unit like a battering ram. Spears splintered and horses fell, dragging their riders with them to their deaths. Their numbers and force allowed a few to penetrate the line, but they were quickly enveloped as reserves filled the open spaces around them. Mergen khemakh swarmed the cavalry and were soon followed by elves as they moved to counter.

***

Commander Arasiel watched as a sudden influx of activity was taking place on his right and could see cavalry forces emerge from the camp, dashing out through the Mergen infantry column’s left flank, causing the formation to buckle and collapse on that flank. An utmost worry set in on the Commander as he saw every soldier Argun could muster push forth right into Oghal’s command formation. He couldn’t believe the balls this Khemakh had on him. To storm through an almost impenetrable wall. It was both incredibly brave as well as suicidal. He also realized that cavalry support would come from Arasiel’s west and that should Oghal go down, it would have devastating effects on the Mergen, despite the all but guaranteed victory here in Sarol. Not only that, but further monetary support from the Mergen would be in jeopardy and he planned to get very rich from this war. “Kanil! Inform Commander Aisen to push his cavalry force to the south and counter from the east of my archers! They’re moving to break out and run, don’t let them! Navai is to remain in position! Come on, you bastards!” Arasiel shouted at his mounted guard unit. “Let’s go kill this bastard!” He said, putting his sword to the sky and pushing forward. As Arasiel pushed his horse as fast as she could carry him, his bodyguard soldiers moved to support, hoping to get in front of him before they’d connect with Argun’s rear flank.

***
Argun could feel the adrenaline and fear mixing as he surged forward. He continued to wave his sword, urging the others on. Their first obstacle soon became apparent as he heard the cries of horses and khemakh. The elven archers had come into range and had let loose a volley at his charging force. He ducked his head a bit and he could see some of the riders around him go down. Milun was nowhere to be seen. Did she fall? Had she stayed behind?

They struck through the front line of the mergen center moments later and he knew many more had fallen there. The long spears of the mergen acting like a wall against the wedge of his own soldiers. He had no idea how many remained, he did not dare chance another glance behind. His focus was forward. He pushed and pushed his horse and could feel its struggle beneath him. He did not see Oghal, but he had long since abandoned such a goal. He sought instead the rear of their line, opening to break free.
Just as he thought he could see the rear and his bid for freedom, he felt his horse lurch forward and tumble. He flung himself to the side to avoid being crushed. As he hit the ground he felt something break in his arm. Pain surged in his mind as he tried to stand. Around him the remains of his charge fell with him. Some were crushed under their own horses while others were soon to follow as the mergen pushed forth with spears and swords. Argun was still dazed from his fall when another pain surged within him and he looked down to see a spear point protruding from his chest. He dropped to his knees and felt the sharp pull as his faceless foe removed it. His eyes looked to the clear blue sky above before everything faded and he collapsed in a heap on the bloodstained grass.

***

The enemy’s charge ended as Oghal knew it would, though they had pushed surprisingly far into their formation. Admirable, but ultimately futile. Arasiel had arrived to help counter the incursion and dispatch the rebel cavalry in detail. None of them survived.

Following the failed charge, the battle reached its end as the remaining defenders at Argun’s camp had begun surrendering with the official surrender soon after by one of the surviving officers. The push to free Sarol was over. It was a start, but Gera still waited in the north and Oghal would not feel comfortable with her position until the dhorva band was brought to heel.

Oghal and her officers rode to the gates of Sarol where they were met by Dehqan and his entourage. She immediately recognized her friend Tuyaara and old ally Sargun. Both had fought alongside her in the Kivoruhn campaign and in the unification wars before it. She gave a salute to the group, which was reciprocated.

“Dehqan”, she said. “I am pleased to find you well.”

“Better, now that Argun’s betrayal has been punished. You have my thanks, as well as my submission, Sahraqan.”

Oghal felt a slight shiver run along her spine at the use of the title. It felt premature, but it also felt good to hear it recognized. “Thank you, Dehqan. With you with us now, we will deal with Gera next.”

“I look forward to it.” Dehqan replied.

“While you know many of my officers, Tokur, Bogun, Gulyar.”, she said in turn as each officer gave a salute to their name. Dehqan nodded to each. “For the one you do not know. Arasiel, commander of the elves of Elvhenen.”

Commander Arasiel approached Dehqan and gave a customary Khemakh salute to him. “An honor to meet you, Dehqan. I saw your forces fight on the field earlier. They fight with a ferocity unmatched by any of those rebellious traitors I witnessed. It is fortunate we have landed upon the same side.”

“I heard of your own ferocity in countering the traitors as they sought to flee for the mountains by the early morning light. You have my thanks and respect, Arasiel. Together, I am sure we will bring many under Oghal’s banner in the time ahead.”

“Dhorvas is as good as hers. It will be good to speak to my grandchildren of how I helped the Sahraqan take her rightful place.” Arasiel said, turning and nodding to Oghal in respect.

Oghal returned the nod to Arasiel. “I look forward to that day.”

Dehqan then spoke up, gesturing with his left arm toward the city of Sarol. “Come, let me invite you into Sarol. You can rest and see to your wounds. I think a feast is in order tonight to celebrate our victory and pay respects to those lost. Then we can discuss plans going forward into the new reign.”

“Yes!”, a shout erupted from Bogun. “Nothing like a battle to make one hungry. Let’s eat.”

Oghal merely rolled her eyes at Bogun’s outburst while several others laughed.

“Dehqan, I do hope you have plentiful stores of alcohol. I feel like they may be emptied by first light, in no small part because of my boys. They get thirsty after a good scrap.” Arasiel said with a weary smile.

Another chorus of laughter moved among the group and Bogun raised his sword in salute toward Arasiel, his face split with a wide grin.

“I am sure we have enough. And with the road to Sarol freed, we can acquire more.” the Raqan said with a smirk “Come.” he said and he turned his horse to lead the others through the gates and into the city. The day’s bloody work was done and the celebration awaited.

Dhorvas, Ryeongse, Kohlenbirke, and Eskeland

The Siege of Junheim Castle

Days after the first battle, Council Room, Tidahamn

The regents were meeting at the council room for an emergency meeting. News of the Battle of Göran had reached them and even worse, the people, who they had been trying to keep all of these problems hidden from them, in fear of their reactions. Luckily for them it was not what they expected, and while many thought of it as avoidable, there was an air of support ,from the majority, for the yet to be King of Eskeland, calling Mikhail's acts as treacherous against his rightful king.

The meeting was led, as always, by Stefan, The Grand Regent. His previous failure to take the threat as an actual threat, left many angry against him inside the council, but he of course didn't care about their opinion. They were seated at a circular table where everyone could face each other. To Stefan's left was Lord Minister Krafft, he of all of them there was the one who was the angriest at Stefan for his blunder. Tapping his fingers on the table, Mikkel couldn't stand listening to Stefan anymore about the new plans he was drawing up. He stood from his chair and began his ranting against him, "That is it, I can't stand this any longer, I've been hearing the same story for days now." He interrupted Stefan mid sentence, "It's your fault we lost that damn battle, it was a massacre! Good men died including one of our commanders and another one has been taken prisoner. All of this because of your stupid mistake of underestimating the enemy. I told you we should have taken the issue more seriously! But oh no, they were just a bunch of unruly peasants in one of their typical revolts."

Stefan's face expressions were emotionless as always however his body movements were not, smashing his fist against the table he responded back, "Oh and you simply think because I was being careful it is my mistake? I did the right thing and now we know the true power of the enemy."

"The true power of the enemy?! You think sending all those men to their death is finding out the enemy's true potential? No...No! Treachery is what it is. This was your plan right? Weaken us, so that Mikhail could have an easier time taking over? You are a traitor!" Said Mikkel dramatically, standing up from his seat.

Stefan stood up from his seat, grabbed Mikkel's shirt pulling him towards him, and looked at him with anger and fury in his eyes, the first time that anyone has probably seen him expressing any emotions, "Me? Me?! You think I am a traitor because of that?! How dare you! I would kill you if I could. You think because they died it's my fault and I am the traitor? If it's anyone's fault, it's the general and his commanders for not coming up with a proper strategy and being inefficient. We gave them enough men and they were stupid enough to get them killed in what is probably the stupidest battle I have heard of."

"Let go of me you bastard, there is no excuse for that! You knew what the enemy was capable of however you sent them off to their death! You always do this kind of stuff, you should have died in their place." He said, spitting on his face.

Stefan let him go, cleaned his face off from his spit then punched him in the face, "Go to hell! Why don't you go and fight them instead of pointing fingers? All you do is go to the parliament building and blabber on and on with the rest of your friends every day and nothing gets ever done! I had to get everything in motion myself to finally pass them here at the council." Most of the council remained in shock afterwards, many did not believe Stefan capable of recurring to violence if so needed.

"Enough the both of you before someone gets hurt for real." Said Gustav av Kindberg, the Lord of Vindheim, "While I did not like this disturbance of the peace of the council, I have to side with Stefan, Mikkel. You are overreacting, it wasn't his fault nor yours, no one could have predicted this, it has been decades since the last war. The general did his best, but the enemy was more prepared, that is war. You should leave this to the people that know. Unfortunately this is your third offence this week, on the basis of disturbance of the session, you are thus suspended from the council until further notice."

"What?! And what about Stefan? He punched me in the face!"

"No action comes without its consequences lord minister, his punishment will come accordingly in a much later date, we are too busy solving this problem, but worry not, he will get it. No one, no matter their rank, is safe from punishment. Now please leave" Said Gustav.

"Outrageous! This won't be the last you hear of me traitors!" Said Mikkel storming out of the council room.

"Grand regent, we must ask you to remain quiet for the remainder of the session, we will take it from here. Now, going back to the subject of the defence of Vindheim and the approaching enemy army towards Tidahamn, we must set up new lines and if possible try to weaken the enemy as much as possible, we must make sure they lose the ability to siege the city, so we can mount a counter-attack..." Gustav took leadership of the regency for the rest of the session, convening with the rest of the regents for the best plans to defeat the enemy. The subject of the arrival and coronation of Prince Theodor also arose some time during the meeting and it was decided that his coronation in Tidahamn would go through no matter what. They would make the arrangements for his safe arrival, although no one knew still how he would arrive, if through land or sea.

------------------

Main Hall, Junheim Castle, Near Vindheim

In the main hall of the castle was the local lord of the castle, Harald av Wieberg. He together with his commander were planning the defences of the castle after hearing of the enemy victory near Göran and their plan of sieging Junheim. His castle was considered a strategic point in the war, it gave Mikhail access to Vindheim and would give him a line of defence against any enemy going towards Helsingstad.

The castle had its time during the War of The Princes when it served as a launching point for Alderik's army. The castle wasn't very impressive looking from the outside. Made of stone with a wooden wall to protect it, It had barely a population of around five hundred and it wasn't in the best of conditions, its maintenance budget cut due to the war, however it could still hold against a few sieges.

Harald had laid out in the table a map of the castle and its surroundings, he and his commanders were deciding what would be the best plan to defend the castle, "The walls are going to be manned by the archers, we need to try to wear them down as much as possible, I was thinking of placing some halberdiers on the walls, to hold the enemy back while the archers retreat when they climb to the walls." Said Harald, scratching his chin.

"But what if they try to destroy the walls with trebuchets?" Said Captain Ehrling

"I do not know, according to reports, they have cavalry, and unless they decide to dismount and go on foot, it might mean they might be bringing artillery, unless they try to break the portcullis with a battering ram, which I believe it is the most likely option, a trebuchet might take them some time to build, that is why we need the rest of the halberdiers to wait for them there, we will have the swordsman wait in the back, in positions were its advantageous for us . This brings me to my other bigger concern, will they set camp or not?"

"They might not, they will try to storm the castle as fast as possible, the more they wait the worse it might be for them. What a dilemma for us this is, we might just be doomed either way." Said one of the commanders, this one scratching the back of his head."

"Still no word from Tidahamn about the reinforcements? The only way we might survive this is if we get some more troops, otherwise we will have to fight till the very end. I will personally make sure to take as many of those bastards to the grave with me. We must inflict as much damage to them as possible, at least enough to slow them down.

A knock on the door interrupted the conversation, in came one of the castle scouts. Exhausted, he took his time to recover his breath before speaking up, "Sorry for interrupting the conversation, sires, but this is urgent." Said the scout.

"Go ahead."

"I have spotted an army of around six thousand men heading towards this direction and it seems like there is a smaller reinforcement army following tail a few kilometres back. I might be mistaken there, but they do seem to be going in the same direction. I unfortunately could not make out the exact numbers, but it seems roughly around the same size as the main one."

"Hmm... This does not bode well for us, our only hope might be our reinforcements, however there is still no word about those." Said Harald.

"Should we evacuate the people sir?" Said Captain Ehrling.

"No, not yet, let us wait for an answer from the reinforcements." Answered Harald.

And that is when another person knocked and entered, it was the courier carrying a message for Harald and his commander, "I apologise for my tardiness, the roads have become more dangerous as of lately."

"Ah perfect, you're finally here, do tell us you have some good news, it is what we all need right now." Said Harald

However by the couriers' expression afterwards, they could already tell there were no good news, "Unfortunately no, the reinforcements have been denied, they said they needed them to reinforce Vindheim and Tidahamn, who were the top priorities at the moment and it seems like nobody is willing to spare any at the moment after the reports of another enemy victory near Hovet." Said the courier.

"Another enemy victory? This is definitely bad news, seems like we really did not take them seriously, where could they have possibly gotten all these troops, mercenaries perhaps? Soldier, how many days is the enemy army from here?" Said Harald dejectedly.

"Two days or so sir." Said the scout

"What do you think sir, should we evacuate the people now?" Said one of his commanders

"Hmm... Very well, send the orders for the people to evacuate, soldier, you're in charge of directing them to Vindheim, any male who can fight and is willing to, tell them to pass by the barracks. We will need all the men we can right now. Let us begin the preparations , we don't have much time, and may the gods have mercy on all of us."

------------------

A Couple of Days later, Junheim Castle

"How is everything coming along, scouts have reported that the enemy is a few minutes away from here, we need to speed things up, Lord Harald wanted this done hours ago." Shouted one of the castle engineers to another from atop of one of the walls.

"I believe we are almost done over here, the only thing that is missing are the barricades on those streets over there."

Climbing the steps up to the walls, Harald approached the master engineer "Master Greger, how are things coming along? We don't have much time, this should have been done hours ago. "Said Harald.

"My lord, we are almost done. The boiling oil has been set up atop of the portcullis, we have torches ready to be lit in every archer position, if they come with any artillery we will be able to burn it. We were also able to build some crenels where most needed, there are also spikes in front of the gate, it will take the enemy some time to take them off. Oh and we were able to procure some quicklime, we just have to throw it at the enemy followed by some water and they will burn." Explained the engineer, he kept showing Harald the rest of the preparations.

"Impressive, very nice Master Greger, you did an excellent job, congratulate the rest for me, if we weren't in such conditions I would raise your pay, but anyways, I believe we are ready to meet the enemy, we might lose this battle, but we will take their whole army to the grave in the process. All that is left is to wait for them to show up... And speak of the devil."

The banners flying in the distance, sporting the colours of the enemy could be seen approaching. The defenders went on high alert, the moment had arrived, but this was supposedly one part of the army, the rest was yet to arrive, but they were still quite far. The army eventually reached a stop at the top of some hills, their army was around the size of six thousand men, just as predicted by the scout. They had ladders with them, but they did not seem to have intentions to set camp or at least that was the impression they gave. The enemy general, Lord Gottfrid Enviken, rode by himself to the castle to speak with Harald, "Harald! I know you're there, show your face!" Said Gottfrid, shouting.

Peeking his head over the crenels, Harald answered back, "What do you want Gottfrid, here to give yourself up and face justice for betraying your country and your future king?"

"Only in your dreams! Surrender the castle to me and I shall spare your lives, there is no need for bloodshed, you know you can't win this one Harald."

"Maybe, but we will never surrender to you or that snake you answer to. You will have to kill us all if you wish to have this castle, we will take you all to the grave with us!"

"Very well Harald, I gave you the option but if that's the fate you wish, then you shall have it, but let it be known that today's blood will be in your hands, may Farehir find you worthy of a place in his hall." Gottfrid soon left to go back to the hill. He quickly convened with his commanders for the next move and as soon as it was decided they began deploying the soldiers accordingly. He would keep his archers in the back so as to not expose them to the defences. They had four pairs of ladders with them, each would go to a different section of the walls and accompanying them would be a regiment of swordsmen to begin climbing as soon as they were in place. They had brought with them a battering ram which they would use to destroy the gate allowing the cavalry to pass through, but they would have to dismantle the spikes first.

"Sir, should we send the engineers to dismantle the spikes?"

"No, we can't risk sending them like that, they would die, let the soldiers take care of it, then we can send the battering ram. Tell the soldiers to begin moving with the ladders, the archers can serve as support, keep them close enough in range for them to keep the enemy archers occupied." Said Gottfrid. He looked up to the sky to check the sun, then he drew in the ground a sundial,

"Hmm... The reinforcements should be here before dawn. Stendahl, Bagge, Malstrom, Make sure this castle is ours by sundown.

Bagge ordered his soldiers to begin advancing to raise the ladders to the walls. The defenders' archers began shooting arrows at them forcing the swordsmen to raise their shields to protect themselves from the arrows. Meanwhile, Stendahl and Malstrom positioned their archers to begin opening fire; not many of their arrows hit the defenders as they were protected by the crenels, but they kept going.

The soldiers closer to the gate took the opportunity to break the spikes the defenders had set up. Screams from the commander on top of the wall could be heard, "Don't allow them to set up the ladders and if they do push them! Archers focus your fire on the ladders, don't mind the enemy archers yet!"

The soldiers kept pushing on until reaching the walls, then they began setting up the ladders. The soldiers close to the gate were able to break the spikes, then join the rest of their regiments. This allowed for Gottfrid to give the orders to send in the battering ram, who began moving towards the gate. Upon noticing the ram, the wall commander gave the order to the archers to light their arrows on fire and begin shooting at it, "There! Make sure it doesn't reach the gate. Light the torches! Archers light the arrows and burn that thing down! Halberdiers, keep them other busy, push the ladders down, make sure they are full to deliver the most damage."

The ram, as soon as it showed up it got rained by fire arrows, and while it had a metal armour on top, it was still flammable, one hit from the arrows in the right place could set it on fire like nothing. The captain of the regiment that carried the ram spoke, "Men, keep pushing faster, we must reach the gate as soon as possible before this contraption catches on fire from the arrows, and careful back there, get your shields up!"

"Damn those arrows, they might just be a problem" Said Gottfrid as he watched the battle unfold from a safe distance, "If only, but they are still not here. You there, tell Malstrom and Stendahl to move closer and to focus on the enemy archers." The soldier nodded. Under the new orders Malstrom and Stendahl did as they were told.

Suddenly one of the soldiers on the walls shouted, "The ram! It's on fire, we did it!" The men cheered.

"Good, good, keep it up, turn your attention to the archers now."

"Sir, we aren't able to push the ladders down anymore, they seem to be holding them!"

"Damn it, prepare to meet them then, take out the quicklime, and those close to the gate be ready with the oil. Archers, begin pulling back as soon as they start flocking en masse."
Gottfrid looked visibly frustrated as he watched the fire destroy his ram, but he didn't let that deter him from his main objective, capturing the walls. "Send the cavalry to burn the gate down, prepare the torches with oil, I want it to burn, and tell the soldiers that manned the ram to join the others."

Bagge who was helping his soldiers climb the ladders, noticed as the soldiers on the wall began pouring on them a white powder, at first he was confused as to what it was and then as soon as he saw them with buckets of water he realised what was about to happen, "Men get away from the ladders!, unfortunately for him his voice could only reach so far and the troops on the other section of the walls suffered the damage. Those who were on the ladder began to get burned when the water dropped on them. Screams of pain could be heard all over as their skin began to burn, and those who were unlucky enough to get it in their eyes went blind, and began falling off from the ladders.

The worst part would come when the cavalry that was sent to burn down the gate, got hot oil poured on them. Despite these losses, they kept pushing on, more cavalry was sent to burn down the gate after the oil was depleted and the soldiers on the ladders that survived began the climb again.

The wall commander ordered their archers to begin a retreat to the plaza, "Great job men, keep it up, we might win this if we keep the same spirit, halberdiers this is your time, keep them from coming any further. Archers begin the retreat to the plaza."

Soon after, the gate began burning. Captain Ehrling, who commanded the forces on the other side of the gate, ordered his men to prepare to engage the enemy cavalry as soon as they got in. another small regiment of halberdiers awaited them. They were efficient against cavalry.

Gottfrid sounded his horn as he led the cavalry charge towards the gate. On the walls, the soldiers of Bagge engaged with the halberdiers. Despite the heavy losses they still outnumbered the defenders. The fight kept going for good while, the defenders kept up a good fight, but eventually they would be outnumbered forcing them to retreat, the commander also following suit, The regrouped with the rest on the plaza.

The cavalry, led by Gottfrid, charged against the defenders on the gate. The initial impact cost them many casualties but once more they outnumbered them and the effects weren't felt much. As the other regiments charged in, the morale of the halberdiers dropped, the consecutive impacts from the charging cavalry disoriented them, forcing a retreat to the plaza like with the others. The same went for the peasant regiments guarding the other areas.

The defenders now surrounded held to the very end in the plaza, with Lord Harald in the middle encouraging the men to hold as much as they could. It worked as they all displayed great bravery in trying to inflict as much damage as possible to the enemy. But at the end of the day they stood no chance, the last remaining soldiers including the commanders and Lord Harald were killed in a heroic last stand, but it came with a heavy price for the enemy as they received heavy casualties, weakening them. A big blow for Mikhail.

Gottfrid dismounted his horse and approached the corpse of the slayed Lord Harald, to pay his respects and give him a proper burial, not only as a brave warrior who stood until the very last, but as an old friend. The rest of the dead soldiers would be given a proper soldier burial as well. "He fought bravely, he was a true warrior and so I hope that even in death he continues being it as he is welcomed in Farehir's realm." Gottfrid kneeled to pray for him before standing up and ordering his men to rest before cleaning up.

"Sir, now what?" Asked Malstrom.

"Now we rest, afterwards we clean up and prepare the castle to serve as our new base. So far the orders given to us were to conquer the castle. We shall stay here until new orders are given to us. Send one of the soldiers to send a message to Mikhail, tell them Junheim Castle is ours and send along with it a full report."

"Yes sir." Said Malstrom, nodding.

Dhorvas, Ryeongse, Kohlenbirke, and Straulechen

Refuge: Part II

Copost with Ryeongse

Byeolsan, Inner District, av Varberg Residence

To say that Byeolsan bustled with life was not an understatement or an exaggeration. Granted, the streets were busy. Geomnaeajin cavalry cantered about, escorting a few palanquins or cartloads of goods. Some children ran about, chasing each other in the midday sun with wooden swords and mock bows. Scholars, military leaders, and bureaucrats lined teashops and government facilities, discussing niche matters to themselves in hushed whispers. Yet, it was not the same bustle as the outer districts of Byeolsan, nor the same in Ryogangsai or the Eskelian city of Skarhamn. There was an air of quiet around it. Of peace.

From the av Varberg residence, the avenue connecting it to one of the main streets of Byeolsan, all the main streets together pointing towards-away from the Royal Palace like a radiant sun, was lined with white walls propped up with polished dark pillars, exhibiting practically identical architectural features as the av Varberg hanok manor. Tall, red-walled buildings with black or golden roof tiles here and there signaled important government and military buildings, correlated in frequency in proximity to the Royal Palace. The main street itself to which the av Varbergs’ avenue connected was similarly lined with rooves, these rising far higher than the more suburban parts from before. It was here that saw the busiest activity, errands, duties, and even play carried out with serene smiles but ones that never raised the city’s noise to a clamor.

Lynn and Ludvig were getting ready to go out and explore their new home. They were to meet with Chief Advisor So Naehwa’s niece, So Heonmye, in a few minutes. She would show them around and help them with anything they needed. Naehwa sent her because she was occupied with state affairs that required her presence. Neither Ludvig nor Lynn were opposed to this, they did want to meet new people and Heonmye was happy to oblige, she, like many in Byeolsan, was curious as to why a foreign royal family was now residing in their country.

Outside of the main building, in the courtyard, the small detachment of the Königsgarde, no bigger than seven men, was out training with the captain. The Ryeongsean soldiers guarding the manor watched them as entertainment or as an opportunity to learn how they trained in Eskeland and perhaps pick a thing or two from their training. The captain noticed the soldiers watching and motioned them with his hand to come and train with them, they refused politely and the captain simply laughed and went back to training his soldiers.

Arriving in a palanquin for three, tall dsen bearers proudly bearing the deep red tiled vessel, was Heonmye herself. The palanquin arrived at the av Varberg hanok residence, and the dsen bearers lowered so that Heonmye could sweep back the silk curtains acting as the door. Dressed in a simple yet elegant white-topped, black-skirt hanbok, Heonmye stepped gracefully out and entered through the hanok gate, finding Ludvig and Lynn, whom Heonmye was retrieving, already in the front courtyard, conversing with one another while waiting for the heiress.

When the time came, Heonmye showed up ready to pick up Ludvig and Lynn, the two were already waiting for her in the courtyard as they sat on one of the benches conversing. Looking forward to testing her knowledge in foregn languages, Heonmye greeted them.

God eftermiddag, mina vänner,” Heonmye called in rough Skeljaner as she waved to the siblings. She added with a chuckle, in more familiar and fluent Kostuan this time, tinged with a bit of a Ryeongsean-Hallish hybrid accent, “I’m trying to practice my Skeljaner but it proves difficult still.” She grinned and bowed at the waist before the siblings. “My name is So Heonmye, and I’ve been sent by the Chief Consul to help you get acquainted with our kingdom.” Smiling more mischievously now, she continued, “Ready to dive into Byeolsan with yours truly, the greatest municipal tour guide anyone could ever ask for in all of His Majesty’s great kingdom?” she spun around and posed in a melodramatic fashion.

“God eftermiddag till dig också.” They said back to her, happy to know someone had a bit of knowledge of their language, probably the rarest thing they would see in Ryeongse, but a welcomed rarity. And even though the way she presented herself was very casual for a noble, they did not mind at all, as a matter of fact they welcomed it, it wasn’t very uncommon in Eskeland amongst the lower nobility. “Great!, we are more than ready, yes, we can’t wait to see what this city has to offer. And allow me to say that your Skeljaner is quite good, not many foreigners learn it, it is quite difficult, they rather learn Halder first. But I might teach you some day if you wish.” Said Ludvig laughing.

“Yes, they all find learning Halder easier since it is more similar to Hallish, but going back to the other topic, I am ready to leave, and we must of course find my brother a job.” Said Lynn, chuckling., “I certainly know what I want to do for a while, I love clothes and I’ve been trying to learn the different fashions of Sokos inhabitants. They say Serulean fashion is the finest, but I personally prefer Rolesian, I have many dresses from there. But if we could stop at a local seamstress that would be amazing, I would like to learn local techniques.

“Ahh yes sister of course a job I had almost forgotten,” He said rolling his eyes, “You know perfectly what I will do, I told you many times at supper yesterday, I will either be a court musician or I will get into the military, although perhaps the administration might not be so bad, whatever allows me to meet more women.”

“Women, it seems like that is all you have in your mind recently, you couldn’t stop talking about how the Ryeongsean women catched your attention. You know what, maybe it is better for you, I heard they are quite strict with their husbands, one of them might be able to set you straight!.” She said laughing

“Very funny sister.” The two kept going at each other for a while. Heonmye stood there not understanding a word they were saying since they switched to Skeljaner mid conversation.

“Well…” Heonmye gingerly interjected, her tongue on her lips, “we should get going.” Despite her still lacking understanding of Skeljaner, she had the odd feeling that the subject matter was best left a mystery. She turned and beckoned the two to follow.

As the three exited the av Varberg residence to their awaiting palanquin, Heonmye added, “Ah, yes, no need to introduce yourselves; you’re the talk of the courts, the city, and probably the kingdom. If but for the moment.'' She stopped, turning once more to face Ludvig and Lynn and halting the three in the beaming sun overhead. The wind rustled slightly, drowning whatever sounds were filling the placid air. Heonmye adopted a more serious tone. “As a humble servant of His Majesty the King, I extend his will for you to learn and gleam from this kingdom what you can, but my personal wish is that you also find time to heal here. Are you two doing alright?”

“Yes, thank you very much for your concern Heonmye, these past days have done us some good, unfortunately I can’t say the same about our mother, she seems different ever since our father died and now she doesn’t stop talking about returning back home, but not home back to Eskeland but somewhere else, I do not know what she means by that but I guess will we find we she finally leaves. Anyhow, where are we stopping first?” Lynn said.

Heonmye’s face lit up again at the mention of destinations. “Have you two eaten yet? Let’s get some food!” She continued, leading the Eskelians to the palanquin. As Heonmye swept back the silk curtain, gesturing them to enter, she smiled, “I know the best soup joint in the entire country; we can continue planning over some noodles!” Heonmye’s face turned a bit serious again. “If you ever need to talk, you can talk to me. Trust me, I know what you’ve gone through. And I can help you.”

“Once again thank you Heonmye.'' Said Ludvig with a warm smile, “Hmm… noodles you say, I have never tried any of that, back home there were some noodle shops runned by Monsu, mostly in the east, but I never got the chance to try it, I believe Lynn did, but in secret.”

“Let’s go then!” Heonmye cheered as the three entered the palanquin. The dsen bearers lited the vessel from the ground and proudly paced to their destination. “You’re missing out on something truly wonderful.”

========

Byeolsan, Inner District, Roseojeok Noodle House

The server gently placed three gold bowls of cold noodles in front of Heonmye, Ludvig, and Lynn. “Enjoy your meals,” he said in very rough Kostuan with a smile.

In each bowl rested a neatly folded mound of buckwheat noodles resting in a sea of cold beef broth, small sheets of shaved ice congregated around them. On top of the noodles were arranged thinly sliced boiled beef loin, julienned cucumbers, paper-thin pear disks, and strips of pickled radish. These dishes joined on the lacquered table at which Heonmye and the av Varbergs were, sitting on silk cushions, a myriad of smaller side dishes on snow-white and ocean-blue Saejin porcelain. From fried anchovies to kimchi to different assortments of raw, fermented, steamed, boiled, or fried vegetables, the table was crowded with colors, different little worlds in their own right with which the three were to explore with their cold noodles serving as the vehicle for all of these. Also among the plates and bowls on the table were three cups and platters of Astral green tea, as well as a spoon and pair of chopsticks, in furbished steel, for each person. For the av Varbergs, a fine engraved fork was given to each, part of a sizable luxury bundle imported from Syrduria.

Jal meokgess’seumnida,” Heonmye gratefully smiled in Gogwihan-eo. “Thank you for the meal,” she repeated in Kostuan.

Lynn and Ludvig also thanked the server, and they began digging in. Ludvig was pleasantly surprised at how good it tasted, expressing satisfaction through his facial expressions. Lynn also was extremely delighted at the taste, the noodles she used to eat from time to time back home did not compare to the masterpiece of the ones she was eating, they were perfect, everything from the beef loin to the pickled radishes were an explosion of flavours in her mouth. The real flavour explosion though came when they began tasting the side dishes and mixing them in with the noodles. Lynn liked the kimchi while Ludvig enjoyed the boiled vegetables

After they finished, they washed down their meal with some green tea and while it was good Ludvig and Lynn still prefered their own tea from Halder, they found Ryeongsean tea to be a tad bit strong for their taste.

Heonmye finished taking a long sip from her teacup. She giggled a little, seeing Ludvig’s and Lynn’s empty bowls. “So, thoughts?”

“I must say, this was simply exquisite, I never ate something this good, I was wrong about Ryeongsean cuisine, they do have some good food, I think I will come here for as long as I can.'' Said Ludvig extremely satisfied with his meal.

“Yes I agree, this was good, the noodles the monsu prepare back home do not compare to this, they are not of the same quality, then again it is not like they have access to the same resources and most of the ingredients they use are local, like the fish, they don’t use anchovies, they use sardines and instead of radishes they use rutabagas or turnips, whatever is in season. I guess you could say it is our own variant of noodle dishes but it is not the same.” Said Lynn

“But anyways, Heonmye, tell us a bit about yourself, where were you raised? Who are your parents? and what is your role in the court?” Asked Ludvig, wanting to learn more about their esteemed host.

“Ah, me,” Heonmye smiled nervously. “It’s you two who are supposed to be the focus here.” After this jest, Heonmye’s face shifted to that of formal neutrality. “I am of the Daemyundan So Clan, a high noble family with a history of duty and professionalism. My aunt is So Naehwa, whom you’ve met. She’s raised me ever since I was a little girl. Some internal political strife put targets on my parents’ backs. I was only nine when I returned home to see it set ablaze and…” Heonmye’s pupils scattered. Her formality had dropped, her face pale and eyes wide. She skipped forward in her narrative, stammering as she did and shaking her head to refocus herself. “My aunt’s the most amazing person there is; she taught me everything I know and fostered my education; thanks to her, I appear to be quite the scholar and the fighter, as well as noodle enthusiast,” Heonmye smiled again, her eyes still focused elsewhere. She pushed herself back to the agenda of the av Varbergs, if but a bit painfully. “Now with a meal had, I’d say next on the list is to tour Byeolsan’s main artisanal square. From seamstresses to jewelers to musicians to even weapons and armor smiths, it’s a burgeoning flower of all things art in the kingdom. Shall we?”

Lynn and Ludvig looked at Heonmye with concern, they knew from the moment she struggled to mention her parents that something not so wholesome was up, but for her sake they decided not to push the matter forward, “Of course Heonmye, I am looking forward to buying an new instrument and practice it, and perhaps a new sword, this one is getting quite rusty, perhaps the captain would appreciate a gift to thank him for his duty.” Said Ludvig scratching his chin.

Following Heonmye towards the palanquin, they got in and headed to their next destination.

========

Byeolsan, Inner District, Artisanal Square

The afternoon sun beamed down on a ring of black roof tiles, held up by white and red walls forming a large, enclosed circle at the junction of several main roads. Signs in Ryeongsean characters announcing facilities such as smithies, jewelry stores, clothiers, potters, artists, and more hung on these walls, to the wonder of several passersby surveying each store.

The Eskelians’ palanquin parked a bit outside the square as Heonmye led Ludvig and Lynn by foot to the square proper. “So this is where the square is,” Heonmye sighed contently, taking in the sights she had seen a thousand times before. “It’s only down the street from your residence, so you may from now on go and come as you wish. Today’s only introductory, so feel free to come back again and again to fully explore what this place has to offer. Now,” she rubbed her hands together, “Go and explore! I’ll also be looking around; I think I need some more clothes and I want to buy some more hairpins. If you have any questions or need me for anything else, come and find me. I won’t leave until you guys want to.”

Lynn and Ludvig went their separate ways. Ludvig went to the local luthier. It was situated awkwardly between two overbearingly encroaching shops: a jewelry store and a printmaking shop. The interior was lit by a few scattered lamps atop shelves and racks of a variety of Ryeongsean stringed instruments, from gayageum zithers to haegum fiddles, made of polished wood and arranged by color, size, and quality. In the corner of the shop, an outlier in the otherwise culturally monotonous display of instruments, was one lone Nyckelharpa. Ludvig approached it curiously.

“That is not for sale young man,” the storekeeper interjected softly in decent Kostuan, smiling, recognizing that Ludvig was a foreigner, “You must be the Eskelian prince, the talk of the town. Your name?”

“Ludvig, sir.”

“Welcome to my shop. I hope you like what you see,” the salesman bowed.

“I am, thank you very much, but I must ask, what is a nyckelharpa doing here?”

“That beauty? I acquired it during my travels through Eskeland. A bard there was selling it for a compelling bargain, so I took the deal. Collecting stringed instruments has always been one of my favorite pursuits.” The old storekeeper sighed retrospectively. “Still, that did not stop this one from breaking a few days ago, and it has since been irreparable. A shame too; it was always one of my favorites to play.”

“Hmm… Well I might be able to help, I used to play this instrument since I was little, I know the ins and outs of it, if you would allow me.”

The storekeeper’s face was washed clean of all color as he stuttered with a comical mix between humility and fear. “Oh no, sir. I could not possibly ask such a thing of a prince. How would I ever repay you for your troubles?”

“It is no bother at all sir,” Ludvig smiled. The old man agreed, reluctantly, and handed the ailing instrument over to Ludvig. He spent the rest of his time repairing the instrument for the old man.

Meanwhile on the other side of the plaza, Lynn decided to follow Heonmye to the seamstress and jewelry shop. First was the clothier. A cozy yet spacious store illuminated beautifully with translucent paper windows boldly displayed on racks rows of Ryeongsean clothing. Fine silk hanbok robes and gowns showcased their deep reds, blues, greens, blacks and whites, stealing attention away from similarly luxurious accessories that were magnificent in their own ways as well. The owner of the shop was ecstatic to have Heonmye and a foreign princess in their shop; she helped them around and exhibited different articles of clothing to Lynn with Heonmye serving as translator.

“Look at these clothes, Heonmye, they are simply fabulous. Do you think you could ask the owners if they could teach me how to make them?” Lynn asked excitedly.

Heonmye opened her mouth cautiously to respond. “Sure, they would be happy. Although if so, you would likely need to spend quite a bit of time here as the seamstress’ apprentice, likely most of the week’s daylight hours.” She smiled, “Not to discourage you; if you’re up to this, then go right ahead. I’m sure His Majesty would be interested in the development of your proficiency in arts and crafts as well as your academic learning.”

“Great, I’m eager to begin as soon as possible. I won’t be much different from my life back home, but I do believe I will need a translator.” She said, chuckling.

Some time after, they left the shop heading towards the main plaza. Their last stop of the day would be the local bladesmith’s shop, where they were supposed to meet with Ludvig. He was already waiting for them there and he waved at them as soon as he saw them approaching.

The shop was quite spacious, as one of the many smithies around Byeolsan, one of the most popular trade shops in the city, thanks to the sheer amount of military personnel in Byeolsan. The walls were a deep stone, with wooden posts, rather than purely wood or straw mixtures. Inside were polished wooden racks, with a fire-resistant coat, showcasing close-combat arms of all kinds. Racks of single-edged do and double-edged geom were arranged nicely in the center of the room, while longer polearms, like the woldo and other glaive-like weapons, lined the walls. To the rear of the store was a large smith’s workshop; although obscured by walls and doors, the sound of clanging metal and heated blades hissing in cold water signified activity.

Near the smith’s workshop, inspecting a long woldo with a black and gold staff, was a man clad in a white and blue hanbok, quite casual for the noble he presumably was but still extravagant compared to the rest of the populace. Heonmye beckoned Ludvig and Lynn forward to introduce them to him; it seemed Heonmye and the man knew each other.

Heonmye approached the man, aloof and unaware, and tapped him on the shoulder. He spun around, caught off-guard, to see Heonmye chuckle uncontrollably. “Almost beheaded me there,” she eked out between bursts of laughter. “I just wanted to introduce you to the Eskelian nobility visiting here today and you gave us a show of the famed valor of the Geomnaeajin.”

The man straightened, the polearm still in his hand, and bowed to Heonmye and the Eskelians at the waist. “Forgive me of my imprudence. My name is Ro Munsang,” he apologized curtly.

“Also happens to be one of the highest-ranking military officials in the kingdom,” Heonmye added with a smirk. Munsang was not amused by her comment.

"A pleasure to meet you Ro Munsang, Ludvig av Varberg is my name and this is my sister Lynn. We have heard quite a bit about you from our short stance here. They say you are one of Ryeongse’s best commanders and a very skilled warrior too. I am glad to meet someone with such prestige.” Ludvig lightly tapped Lynn’s shoulder and whispered to her ear, “Hey Lynn, don’t you think he is quite attractive? And he is a skilled warrior, you said you like warriors.”

“Oh keep quiet now, will you? Yes sure he is quite attractive and being a warrior and all is very nice, but I barely know him.”

“Poor Christian, his future wife, taken away from him by a Ryeongsean.” Said Ludvig, laughing,
“He deserved it if you asked me, he wasn’t a good match for you, and now that we are not restricted by conventions about marriage, this could be your opportunity. As for me, I saw this beautiful girl while I was walking down the street, she looked like an angel, she had this quiet demeanour about her, brown hair and eyes, I believe she must be a noble, she was accompanied by some guards and she later on got on one of those palanquins. Might have to ask Heonmye about her much later.”

“Alright whatever you say brother.”

Ludvig tapped Heonmye on the shoulder and whispered on her ear, “I think Lynn like Ro Munsang.” He soon switched to talking normally, “Heonmye, may I talk to you in private about something.” He said, winking at her.

Heonmye furrowed her eyes with suspicion. “Sure,” she responded, understanding but still unsure of Ludvig’s hint. Regardless, with shaky confidence in that supposition, she added, “We’ll be right back. You two can chat while we discuss… whatever Ludvig wants to discuss.” She smiled and exited behind Ludvig.

Outside, Heonmye turned with a serious face to Ludvig. “I think I see what you want to do here, but it’s quite the risky move,” she began exasperatedly to a still-smiling Ludvig. “What would happen should whatever you’re planning between Lynn and Munsang falls apart? Do you think this could really work or is this another one of your games?”

“Well, nothing really, I guess that means it wasn’t meant to happen, but, I know Lynn took an interest in him, she shows it in her body expressions and I believe I heard Munsang is single? Do correct me if so, either way I do believe it will be fine, but anyways let’s go, I’m sure by now they must have spoken enough with each other.”

Heonmye narrowed her eyes. “Alright,” she nodded slowly. “I’ve known Munsang since childhood and if anything, he’s pretty aloof. Not sure how he can handle something as sophisticated as romance, but if he’s fought for His Majesty’s kingdom, then there’s little he shouldn’t be able to do.” She cleared her throat and adopted a lighter face. “And was there something else you wanted to discuss?”

“No, I think that is it.” He said, smiling

“Okay, then,” Heonmye replied, matching Ludvig’s smile. “If you wanna get in on some action yourself, you can and likely should; this provides an opportunity likely to be unmatched by anything else in your life. However, do exercise caution and wisdom in doing so.” Heonmye turned towards the door of the shop, sliding it open. “We should probably go in and save Munsang and your sister before anything happens,” she giggled.

“Yes, let's go,” Ludvig agreed.

Elvhenen, Dhorvas, Ryeongse, Kohlenbirke, and 1 otherStraulechen

Bloodlines - Part 3
Copost with Volgaro

Despite its name, the Grand Palace of Kohlenbirke was not really grand in any sense. True, it was larger than any other building in the city, but it was built for utility, not show. Cobweb-filled underground tunnels and rat-infested priest holes connected the castle to itself and its surroundings in irregular ways. It was through one of these tunnels that Gabriele and Olaf returned to the castle, dragging the corpse that they would claim was their informant between them. They couldn’t have returned publicly. Although one person at a distance might be able to be fooled - hopefully including that ambusher that had gotten away - convincing a crowd of people who would undoubtedly be very close to the body that the corpse was still alive would be impossible.

It was more uncomfortable in the tunnel than Gabriele remembered. She cursed her childhood memories for being inconveniently mis-sized. The tunnel was neither tall nor wide enough for the job they were doing, but the secrecy was paramount - even secrecy from Gabriele’s closest advisors. Someone in this castle had been the one to pass along the report to Greta’s men that Gabriele would be traveling the south road.

The tunnel opened into a dusty basement stacked high with the detritus of the past. Threadbare tapestries, ancient paintings that were more dust than art, and seemingly every piece of furniture that had ever had reason to be replaced. Gabriele dropped her end of the former swordsman as soon as she could stand up.

“Can we please agree…” she panted, “that we should at all costs… avoid having a reason to do this ever again?”

Olaf chuckled between breaths. “What? You don’t like bonding over carrying a body through cramped tunnels?” He said playfully before dropping his half.

“I’ll have you know that was the castle’s most romantic tunnel,” Gabriele answered in a complete deadpan. “How dare you insult some random architect from three hundred years ago?”

“Oh my deepest apologies my lady, I had not known you chose such an exclusive spot.” Olaf said with a chuckle. “Now where to?”

“Let’s find something to hide him behind. Then… which of your men likes to talk the most?”

“Other than me it is probably Alek.” He said thinking.

“I’m not known for sharing secrets. If a rumor came from me, there might be those who disbelieve it on principle. But my people don’t know you as well. Can you tell the story of what happened to us to Alek? With one important change?”

—————

The sun had fallen below the horizon, and while there was still noise coming from the great hall, the rest of the castle was mostly dark. Gabriele had just officially turned in, sent her maid away, and as far as everyone else was concerned, was spending the rest of the night unconscious to the world. Behind her locked door, however, she was fully dressed. The thick leather armor made movement a little more difficult than usual. Even though she was used to wearing it, she cursed herself for not wearing it more often — or at least spending time rolling and unrolling it. It hadn’t ever really gotten supple, and had actually started to go hard again. But there was nothing to do about it now.

She checked that her dagger was at her belt and pulled on the cloak she usually wore to bed. As long as her clothes were covered, she could easily say she was headed to the kitchen for a drink if she was stopped along the way. She put out her oil lamp and then opened the door to the hallway. Moonlight cast the stones in the hallway into relief as she moved along to Olaf’s door. She knocked softly.

Olaf answered the door, opening it slowly before peering out to see who it was, then noticing Gabriele grabbed and opened the door revealing an axe in his right hand that had been hidden by the door.

He whispered. “You know in most cases this would be considered improper of a lady to visit a nobleman at this hour.”

“I’m quite improper. You’ll have to get used to it.” She paused to smile at him in faux-innocence. “I heard the rumors about the capture being whispered at supper. Be sure to thank Alek for me if I don’t get the chance. Now, I believe we have an appointment with a traitor. Shall we?” She stepped back, allowing him to take the lead if he wished.

He stepped forward, slinging the axe onto his shoulder and walking ahead.

“Upstairs,” she added from behind him. That afternoon, Alek had positioned himself at the door of one of the upper chambers. He’d made no secret about guarding a prisoner that Gabriele and Olaf had captured earlier that day, and the rumor had quickly spread that the prisoner would be ‘questioned him in-depth’ - a polite term for torture - tomorrow. Now, they’d go to relieve him, and lie in wait… with luck, for the traitor to come and put an end to their ‘captive’ before he could spill his secrets.

As the two made it to the upper chambers on the stone floor laid the volgar warrior, blood pooling around his neck. Off to the side, a few feet away lay the knife that had done the deed. Olaf stopped, dropping his axe to the floor before walking to his friend's now lifeless body, quietly kneeling down and closing Alek’s eyes. “Rest well old friend.” he whispered, balling his hand into a fist.

Gabriele was right beside him a moment later leaning over Alek’s body. “I’ve failed him.” She paused for a moment as is only right, to pay her respects to the dead man who’d died following her plan. Then she looked over at Olaf, angry steel in her eyes. “Whoever the traitor is, they’re more ruthless than I’d imagined. If this is the game they want to play, I’ll play.” She stalked over and picked up the knife. Its hilt was ornamented with a single ruby. “Someone will recognize this. Then we’ll put the beast down.”

“I’ve had enough of this game of cowards.” Olaf said standing. “Get your army prepared, Volgaro will be in Kohlenbirke by sunrise.” He said walking away and grabbing his axe.

—————

Within the hour Olaf had ordered two of his men to ride for the Volgar force that had been waiting on the edge of the border of Kohlenbirke. The two riders were sent instructions to lead the army to the castle in order to link up with Gabriele’s forces.

Meanwhile, Gabrielle had her own work to do. She had two pressing matters, however. First, she needed to identify the traitor in their midst. So, as she sent a page boy to her commanders to have them gather their men to the city, she also paid a midnight visit to her armorer. If anyone could identify the knife, it was he.

She strode into his lamplit workshop as he sat tinkering with one of his many projects and stabbed the knife down into the tabletop in front of him. The bloodstained blade had the desired effect.

The armorer looked up from his work, though of all else beyond the knife gone. “What is this my lady?” Through the tremble in his voice, Gabriele could have almost believed he did the deed himself.

“Someone has just murdered one of our allies in my castle. They used this blade. “Who did you make it for?”

With this, he broke. “I’m sorry my lady, I didn’t know what he were going to use it for!”

She leaned over his desk and yanked him to his feet. “I don’t even have the equipment that would appreciate your slobbering, you codshead! I don’t need your apologies, I need answers!”

“It was Aschwin, my lady, your intelligencer. He’d lost a knife and he sent Korb to fetch a replacement!”

Gabriele let him go with a shove that sent him back into his seat. “I’ll deal with Aschw—” She stopped and turned back to stare at the man. “Hold a moment. You said the Steward came to get a new knife for my head of intelligence?”

Her armorer just nodded.

“In what world could you ever imagine Aschwin Amsel not dealing with you directly over weapons? Korbinian wasn’t sent by him, he simply wanted a knife that looked like his.” She grabbed up the knife again and stomped back out to the guards waiting at the door.

“Find my Steward. Get the entire guard on it. Now!”

—————

One Hour Later

As the sun rose banners could be seen along the horizon, thousands of straki and infantry marched towards the castle waving the colors of houses Reinhardt and Drovic.

Gabriele was not the first to notice them. She was sat in the stables, hunched over, frowning. No one had found Korbinian Meyer yet, and by all the signs, they never would - at least not on this side of the border. He’d undoubtedly fled to her cousin’s court by now. As one of her riders returned from the border road, he jerked his horse to a stop, and looked about in alarm. The alarm seemed to be spreading down the street, and Gabriele jumped to her feet to go look as well.

The horses and men flying Volgaran flags flooded the streets. There must have been as many again as her own army. If this was what Volgaro brought… She whirled to face her own men who were nearby. “They’re here! We end this today!”

Olaf rode to meet Gabriele before they marched, unlike the rest of his time here, he wore ornate armor, a curved sword on his side.

“Volgaro will show its strength today.” He said boldly.

Gabriele took no extra time on words until she’d thrown her saddle on her horse and mounted it. The Kohlenbirkan army, unlike their Volgaran counterparts, had no finery. They wore simple leather armor for the most part, and even Gabriele had only chainmail layered with hers. But they numbered again as many as their visitors, and they had been waiting for this day.

Gabriele sidled her horse up next to Olaf’s. “Do we have a plan? Or shall it be a simple, straightforward crush?”

“We will draw them out into the open, and crush their men’s fighting spirit with a single precise charge.” Olaf said, holding his hand in the air before waving it in a circular motion.

One of the men at his side raised a small plain yellow banner in the air as another blew on a warhorn, throughout the volgar lines yellow-white banners were raised in response as the whole army formed itself into marching order.

“We are under your command for now my lady.” Olaf said before putting his helm on.

As the Volgars began to move, Gabriele slowly… stopped. It was all she could do to keep her mouth closed. “Your cavalry… demand attention. I can hardly look away. I’d hate to be on the receiving end of one of your charges…”

“That tends to be the point, the leśniczy and Druzinki will soften them up before the Straki and infantry charge, with any hope these men will know they are outclassed.” Olaf said before looking at Gabriele. “But I assume you have something in mind for your force with the way you speak.”

“I’m not sure… Our men are battle-ready, yes… Or at least I thought so. But we have nothing that compares to this presentation of force. Can we use that to our advantage? I don’t know. Yet.”

Olaf looked over his men and then back towards Gabriele’s. For a moment he pondered before calling a man over in the Volgar tongue and speaking to him for a moment before he turned back to the lady of Kohlenbirke. “We shall act as the Vanguard and you and your men shall bring up the flanks, Hugo will accompany you since he knows our signals and military mannerisms. Is this acceptable?”

“A liaison sounds like a good idea. We do have a tactic that we use from time to time that seems to suggest itself here. Normally when we do it we’re setting an ambush… We make our infantry seen, and slowly draw back, then give them a cavalry charge from the side. It breaks smaller formations. But depending on where we meet them, if you keep their attention we could run across their back lines.” She grinned in a manner that called to mind a cat that had happened upon a lame chick. “I bet that would break them quickly.”

“Then that’s our plan.” He summoned several men on horses explaining in detail the plan in the Volgar tongue before they bowed and rode to their respective columns. “We are ready to march my lady, and seeing as this may very well be my last time speaking to you. I at least have a favor to ask.”

Gabriele cocked her head to the side inquisitively. “I hold your combat skills in higher regard than that, Olaf. After all, I’ve seen them. But make your request. I’ll grant it if I’m able.”

“If I do end up surviving this I would like to offer my hand as the one that seals our pact.” He said sternly, his mask hiding a smirk.

Gabriele’s right eyebrow almost shot off her head. “Is that so? Well, if you survive, I might take you up on that. If you ask properly.” And she swung herself onto her horse and trotted off to join her men.

—————

The sunshine of the previous day had given way to light drizzle on the road through Ackenhofen, the northernmost town in Konesburg’s domain. The almanagists had predicted only a slight rain in the morning, but it was almost noon and Tobias Meyer - the captain of the guard north of town - was waiting for it to end. He’d just received his captain’s pauldron and wanted to see how it looked in the sun.

But just now, he could swear that it was raining harder. Maybe it was all in his head, but he could swear that the thunder that had rolled a few times in the distance was growing closer. He dropped his feet off of his desk and sauntered outside, peering up at the sky. It really wasn’t all that rainy. The sun was peering out from behind a cloud, and the day showed all the signs of getting better. So where was the thunder coming from?

He let his gaze fall from the sky and was suddenly struck still by the vision that confronted him. Down over the hill to the north, almost as if they were riding from the storm clouds themselves came a horde of ungodly angels on horseback, riding at a full gallop in a perfect chaos of formation. Surely the end of the world was upon them all. This is what it would look like. Tobias gave a shout and turned to run back inside as the wave of cavalry broke over the suddenly-flimsy gate that was supposed to have been Konesburg’s first line of defense. The whole fence came down and screams filled the air as the few men who were fool-hardly enough to put up a fight died at the end of blood-soaked lances.

Then suddenly… silence.

Tobias carefully crept to the door, opening it a crack, and found the road empty. He walked out in a daze, looking around at his forces that lay dead or scattered. And then another thunder of hooves came over the hill.

This time, they were at least human, and Tobias stood, waiting, as they drew closer. At their head was a woman he’d hoped to have only met under very different circumstances. He recognized her as soon as she pulled her horse up to him. She let her sword slide slowly across his chin, the tip drawing a bead of blood. “Captain. Why are your men dead all around you, and you seem untouched? You didn’t fight with them? Give me one good reason I shouldn’t kill you where you stand.”

The Volgar to her right stared down at the man before looking at the lady, and in rather rough kostuan saying. “Coward.”

“Indeed.” Gabriele glared at the man before her. “You now have one task. Go to whichever town you want and tell them that the pretender’s reign is over. After that, go. I have no need for you in my land, and my sword is ill at the taste of your blood.”

—————

The Kohlenbirkan forces lagged behind the Volgars but what they lacked in speed, they made up for with their knowledge of the land. As the Volgars crossed the river and proceeded south on the main road, Gabriele’s forces took to the back roads and fields, sticking close to the treeline. Once the forward riders caught sight of Greta’s soldiers, they’d move into the forest to cover their approach.

As the Volgars drew closer to Konesburg, however, it became evident that apparently one or two soldiers had managed to flee the slaughter at Ackenhofen, for just north of Weinsedorf, the enemy was assembling. They blocked the main road as it made its way over a low hill. Forest to the east would confine the movement of the cavalry, and to the west the river was a natural boundary that rendered that flank - if not impervious - at least an unsavory target. Though not an elite fighting force they seemed to have been trained well by the few Alvar veterans still left in Greta’s court. Pikemen were assembled along the middle of Konesburg’s lines, already preparing to fall into a square, around the archers, but the outer flanks were thin - there was not enough time to bring everyone into formation.

Olaf stopped his host looking over the Konesburger force with a spyglass before raising his hand while looking to his captain. “Let them know our fury from afar.”

Another set of banners were raised as the archers and cavalry alike readied bows, spreading their own lines into formation, and let loose a volley towards the enemy lines.

The first volley from the Volgars rained down on Greta’s army and men fell, but shields were raised, and the surviving archers sent a volley of their own back to the north as they maneuvered apart, leaving gaps that would hopefully swallow some of the volley, and they sent one of their own flying back resulting in the less protected within the Volgar lines to fall.

Meanwhile, in the forest to the west, Gabriele and her troops moved quietly. Slower than they’d have liked to have been, they crept up on the battlefield until they were positioned slightly behind the army from Konesburg. Gabriele motioned her Volgar liaison forward. “It should take us a few more minutes to get to the edge of the forest. Can you safely signal when we’re in position?”

The Volgar nodded, taking out a horn before blowing it, making it scream its call through the air.

Meanwhile Olaf ordered another volley followed by his infantry beginning to march forward towards the Konesburger lines.

Gabriele looked back to her men. She did not make her orders audible to all; that could have given them away. “Pass instructions,” she said to those closest to her. “We’re hitting their flank. We’ll ride on their hindquarters. Horsemen, javelins. Footmen, arrows. Do not engage. We are trying to get between them and the Konesburg bridge. Regroup once we’re there.

Olaf looked to his comrades, lowering the mask of his helm before raising his sword in the air. “We ride to glory! For the motherland and the saints!” He yelled pointing his sword towards the enemy before the sound of war calls and horns began blaring as the Volgar cavalry charged down the hill.

The formation that had loosened before now rushed to retighten, pikes dropping in preparation for the incoming charge. The southern army's attention was so focused on the inevitable clash with the Volgaran cavalry that only a few noticed Gabriele and her men swinging past them to the south. They did not notice that is, until the men in the back began to fall to well-placed arrows and spears. Still, the main confrontation was too much for them to break formation yet. If they moved now they would surely be slaughtered. It was to their veteran commanders’ credit that they held fast, but would they survive when that cavalry slammed into their lines?

The First to slam into their lines was the Volgar infantry, the Kirol barking orders to the Wojowniki under their command. Olaf’s Druzinki split off from the charging hoard brandishing their bows and firing into the enemy formation. Quickly approaching the lines were the Straki shouting all manner of battle cries as they lowered their spears to meet the enemy lines.

The charge was met by the wall of pikes, and though a few horsemen went down, just as many pikes splintered as lances. Then the horses met the thrust of the swords from within the formation, and arrows peppered the ground - and men - in both directions. The Konesburg army was near breaking, and although there was an awareness that more troops were behind them, there was no chance to deal with them now.

But even that belated danger was about to become immediate. Seeing the charge smashing into the lines of pikemen, Gabriele spurred her own mount forward. “Let’s not let them have all the fun, boys! We finish this now!” And the Kohlenbirkans closed the gap from behind.

Less than half an hour and the fighting was over. Half-trampled bodies lay pressed into the dirt where they fell, broken spears and swords among them. From that pool of death, it trailed to the north west, where the remnants of Konesburg’s army had tried to flee. But there was nowhere for them to run. One army or the other lay between them and safety. At the muddy edge of the river lay the few that had been unlucky enough to make it to the river, but not into the water. More than a few of the younger Kohlenbirkan soldiers were on their knees as well, left where they’d needed to fall, sickened by the death that they saw before them.

Gabriele found Olaf in the chaos that was slowly re-organizing itself into smaller groups as fighters moved back and forth inside the armies, trying to find out if their friends had survived. “I do not want to become accustomed to this. If I ever do, remind me of today.”

Olaf pulled the reins of his horse to face the countess, pulling off his helm. He wore a tired expression on his face as he clutched where a stray arrow had made its way through his armor. “Let’s hope after this peace will come to these lands, lest more blood will be shed for nothing more than pride.”

With his free hand he waved over one of his men. “Take the Druzinki and scout ahead I want to know if Greta is sending any other forces to meet us.” He then pointed to a Kirol on the ground. “Order the men to gather the dead, divide them by who they belong to, if any are wounded be it ours or theirs let the healers look after them.”

Both men began to bark orders in the Volgar tongue to their respective underlings, before they proceeded to carry out their orders.

Gabriele was obviously chafing to ride directly to Konesburg, but she realized the wisdom in waiting. Still… “We should not wait long. If they — When Greta and her people hear about the outcome of this battle, the traitor who killed Alek will undoubtedly flee again. Let us take our best forces and ensure that that does not happen.”

“After Vasili returns with the Druzinki, we will take your forces and what remains of my infantry to begin to lay siege, shortly after the rest will join us from the rear.” Olaf said, sighing before smiling at Gabriele.

—————

Konesburg, only a mile and a half away from the fighting, had clearly received reports about the fighting already. As the combined Kohlenbirkan and Volgaran armies made their way into the outskirts of the city, Gabriele — riding at the head of the army, which had so far found no resistance — was struck by how empty it felt. Some of the citizenry had already left their houses, taking refuge in the castle grounds. Others had clearly chosen to remove themselves from the conflict altogether by fleeing south and west away from the capital. Forgotten bags of provisions and satchels of tools lay where they’d been dropped. Down an alleyway a mother huddled with her daughter, clearly terrified of what would happen to them.

Gabriele, held up a fist, and brought up the reins of her horse to pause for a moment. She raised her voice loud enough for what she was about to say to be passed through the ranks. “Greta may be our enemy, but these people are our brothers and sisters. Any man who treats them as anything less will answer to me!”

Olaf translated these orders into the Volgar tongue for his men who responded by clasping their gauntlets against their chests in salute.

Behind the two armies the camp followers and engineers were busy preparing for a siege, large boiling pots of food had been prepared, ladders and all manner of siege weaponry was being put together with haste from the surrounding trees.

The army resumed its push forward.

Still, there were no answering forces.

They marched through deserted streets, homes and businesses either abandoned with doors flung wide or shuttered with fearful faces peering through cracks. Even when they arrived at Castle Konesburg there were no forces arrayed against them. Gabriele was prepared to ride out in front of the castle to demand Greta’s surrender, but as she was about to spur her horse forward, Olaf grabbed the reins. He pointed to the glints in the upper reaches of the castle. “I would rather not see you killed by those archers on the walls.”

Gabriele blinked, looking upwards, and then nodded. “I should have thought about that. It’s what I’d do, too.”

Olaf nodded. “We should surround the castle and starve them out, the engineers are putting together what we will need to pierce those walls.”

“We should place patrols around the outer edges of the city as well,” Gabriele replied. “I’d wager that this castle has at least as many tunnels as Kohlenberg. I don’t want Greta escaping while we sit here thinking we have her cornered.”

“I will have my Druzinki and straki act as these patrols then.” Olaf said, looking back up to the walls. “This ends here.”

“Take some of my hobilars with you. They’ll be able to keep up and they know the terrain better than most.”

Olaf nodded, giving one of his commanders an order in the Volgar tongue, within the hour his Druzinkis and the hobilars had secured any escape from the castle, now all that was left for them to do was wait on the engineers to finish their tasks.

—————

It was a long wait on both sides. Fortunately, some of the wait gave Gabriele time to move discreetly through the town, directing her men to help with repairs where possible, and to secure homes and shops that had been left open. The townspeople quickly became aware that Gabriele was not going to allow her soldiers to run amok, and the few that did get out of hand were punished quickly and ruthlessly. She secured the services of a scribe, and had notices posted with information on how to contact her quartermasters if the townspeople needed any supplies that they would have normally received from Greta. The only exception to this was that she had an empty woodworking shop cleared of its workbenches and set up there as a sort of local point of contact and a forward base while the majority of the armies stayed just outside town.

Much of her efforts went unrewarded. The people of Konesberg did not trust her or her men, and trusted the strange northerners even less, but there were signs that it was changing. It would be a slow process, but it was a process, and that was all that could be asked of them right now with a combined army nearly as populous as the city itself. Gabriele had no doubt that the army could be seen as a huge threat to the city’s way of life.

Still, the wait seemed interminable. She wanted nothing but to take the castle by force and throttle her cousin with her bare hands, but that was probably not going to be the way it would happen, and she would have to live with that. And she could live with that — as long as Greta did not.

One of Olaf’s runners entered the workshop and bowed. “Lord Drovic would like a word with you.” He said, his kostuan obviously rusty from lack of use.

Gabriele rose from where she’d been sitting to read. This was a welcome interruption for more than one reason. She’d gotten tired of poring over the many tiny laws Greta had passed for the city folk to follow, and truth be told, she just wanted to see Olaf again anyway. “Is he coming here, or should we go to him?”

The man nodded. “Follow.” He said bluntly before turning around and walking leading her to Olaf's tent among the Volgar siege encampment.

There Olaf sat tending to what remained of his wound from the previous battle, noticing Gabriele approaching he smiled and reapplied the wrappings with the help of one of his men before speaking. “I’m glad you accepted my invitation, my lady.” He said with a playful tone in his voice.

Gabriele gave a tiny curtsey, about as much as she could do in the armor that had become her daily fashion. “I hope you’re not too badly hurt. Have they said how long that will take to heal?”

“Should be healed in a day or two. Care to join me by the fire? We just started the coffee.” He said as he motioned to a large pot with a bubbling black liquid in it.

Gabriele sat down, pulling a chair closer. The morning was cold yet, and the warmth would be welcome. “DId you invite me here because you were worried I might catch a chill?”

“Perhaps, I would be lying if I said your safety had not become important to me, but one of the reasons I summoned you here was to give a report.” He said with a chuckle.

“Ah, a report. It’s not going to be like yesterday when the baker set fire to his own shop and tried to blame it on us, is it?”

“No not at all, the siege weapons will be complete before sunrise, I suggest we attack while the early morning mist covers our men’s approach.” He paused, “Secondly, I must request you stay nearby, after what happened to Alek I would hate for some sort of assassin to target you again.”

Gabriele’s face did the grumbling for her. “I don’t like hiding… But I do see the wisdom in being careful. I have something to ask you in return, however.”

“Ask me anything, my lady.” He said filling two cups with the black liquid in the pot and handing one to Gabriele.

She took the cup, and took a sip of the coffee, possibly to hide her face as she spoke. “You should remain nearby as well. I know you. I’d rather not be carted off to some doddering old chieftain to fulfill my agreement with Volgaro.”

The liquid was bitter, with a slight taste of what had been in the pot before.

“Trust me, I have no intention of dying until I can seal our vow before the last battle.” He said with a smirk sipping his drink.

“Before?” Gabriele laughed, nearly choking on her coffee. “That’s a bit hasty, isn’t it?” Her tone isn’t one of offense taken, but teasing. “What if we lose?” It’s clear that she considers that outcome so extremely unlikely so as to be impossible.

Olaf chuckled. “It might be, but as I have said I’ve become rather fond of you, and if we do lose then I shall take a good few of Greta’s men with us.”

“If you die, can I have all your things?” The deadpan is impeccable.

“Never took you for the type to want possessions.” He chuckled once more before going serious for a moment. “May I make one more request?”

“But they’re just so nice.” Then she goes serious again. “Ask, please.”

Olaf thought for a moment. “Two actually.” He finished his drink, placing the cup back on a small rack near the fire. “First, if I do fall I want to be buried here with my men that fell avenging our kin.”

“Of course. And rest assured, if that were to happen, you will be avenged as well.” And her voice took on a tone that completely told exactly how bad that would be for anyone on the receiving end of said vengeance.

“Secondly, as I have no clue what the proper way of asking is in Kohlenbirke, I would ask to officially seal the pact.” He said sternly. “Regardless of if I fall I have found myself enraptured with this land and it’s people and would not dream of leaving it or you to some pompous noble who is little more than a pawn of their house leader.”

“Well, the Alvaringen way is somewhat full of pomp and ceremony, but —” She suddenly found herself unable to finish that phrase. “Perhaps you’d do better asking one of the men.”

“It’s not the men I’m interested in hearing from, the Volgar way is rather straightforward all be it tonight would become a party the men could enjoy before the carnage of the morn.” He said with a chuckle.

“Oh, so I don’t have to explain it after all.” She seemed relieved at that.

Olaf only laughed before standing. “Well I will ask the camp women to prepare some sort of tent for the occasion, and the men can get out our stock of vodka.”

Gabriele raised an eyebrow. “Vodka? Is that a fish?”

The rest of the Volgars present laughed for a moment before Olaf’s gaze silenced them.

“It is a drink, rather cheap in comparison to others nobility are used to but it gets the job done for morale.” He then waved over one of the camp women, whispering in her ear before she ran off giggling.

His gaze then met the men around the fire, who quickly stood and ran off in another direction.

Gabriele’s head was on a swivel as she watched them leave. “Where is everyone going?”

“The men, to go get the Vodka, and the woman is going to make one of the larger tents usable and try and see if anyone brought instruments and to begin cooking a feast..” Olaf said with a playful tone. “We will make merry tonight!” He said with a chuckle.

“It still seems a bit premature for a celebration, but I suppose I shouldn’t complain too much. I wouldn’t want to put myself in a position where you felt it was your duty to punish me for my behavior.”

Olaf looked at her for a moment thinking about what she said before realizing. “Oh alright then. I will ask the women to help you get prepared.” He said, clearing his throat a bit. “Until then I must prepare myself as well.”

“You’d better, I don’t plan on being easy to handle,” she grinned, and took a drink of her coffee, gulping it down despite it still being a little too hot for comfort. “I’ll see you tonight, then?”

“Of course.” He said smiling at her before walking away.

—————

An hour later a few of the camp women would come to the workshop that Gabriele had been staying in, a mix of brushes and other devices in their hands. One of the older ones had something folded in her arms.

Gabriele turned at the sound of so many footfalls at once. Truth be told, she expected trouble, and had since the meeting with Olaf and the warning. Her stance relaxed when she saw the women. “What’s all this in aid of?” she asked, bemused by the array of equipment they brought with them.

The eldest of the group looked at Gabriele with a smile. Saying something in the Volgar tongue in a kind tone and pulling a chair up pointing towards it. Gabriele’s brows furrowed, but she took the proffered seat, still looking about inquisitively.

The woman took hold of Gabriele’s hair and began brushing it and humming a slow calming tune. Two others began filling a small bucket with hot water motioning towards the ladies feet.

Oh, it was a bath, of sorts. This, Gabriele was used to, even if she preferred to do it herself most often. She relaxed, and leaned back in the chair, letting the women do what they needed to do. It might still be a strange experience, but at least it would not be entirely unpleasant.

The eldest woman spoke up in the Volgar tongue once again looking at Gabriele with a questioning look. Gabriele did not understand, and could offer nothing but a shrug. “I do not understand.”

The woman grasped Gabriele’s hair pulling it up and saying something then down and saying another phrase. Gabriele thought she understood, and lifted a lock of her own hair by the end, and layed it in a circle on the crown of her head. “Up, like this?”

The woman nodded, waving two others to come and braid her hair up the way she had, at the very least thought Gabriele wanted. Walking in front she smiled unfolding a rather old but elegant dress.. Gabriele was not immediately taken by the dress. It was even more out of fashion than her best dresses. However, it was being presented as if it were important, an heirloom perhaps, and she knew better than to throw an insult at them by refusing it. She smiled. It was not an ugly dress after all. It would do.

After the women finished getting her hair ready they helped her into the dress. Taking a step back they all giggled and gasped. The elder woman took Gabriele’s face in her hands, a tear going down her face. “Beautiful.” She said in rough kostuan before another slew of words in the Volgar tongue were said.

It was not often that Gabriele was moved to the softer emotions. It had been learned early and harshly that showing them could lead to downfall, and the war had accentuated that. So it was much to her own surprise that she found herself holding back tears and forcing a smile as she rose and took the old woman’s hands. “Thank you. I am honored.”

A knock came from the door soon after. Gabriele, operating with the caution she had promised, motioned for one of the other women to open the door. “Please?” She hoped her tone conveyed the politeness with which she was trying to make her request.

The elder woman opened it on the other side was two of Olaf’s original entourage in the finer clothing they could find. Both bowed “Lady Gabriele everything is prepared if you would follow us.”

Gabriele inclined her head, gave another uncertain smile to the women who had helped her prepare, and then exited to follow the men, closing the door behind her.

The two men led her to a large lit up tent, smells of food, sounds of instruments, and singing all came from within.

One of the men chuckled,chuckled, “It seems the boys couldn’t wait to start.”

Gabriele snorted good-naturedly. “I have never expected any differently.”

As they entered Olaf could be seen dancing with his men and of course drinking heavily. He quickly looked over seeing Gabriele, a large smile painted across his face.

Gabriele shook her head with a smirk. “Boys will be boys,” she laughed. Then a thought occurred to her. She looked around for her advisors, her court. There would be hurt feelings if they were not invited. She gave a sigh of relief when she spotted most of them over in a corner. They weren’t quite sure what to make of the festivities, apparently, but then she saw some of her men that had joined in the dancing. Apparently the people in Kohlenbirke before her grandfather’s day shared many of the customs with the Volgar. The thought strengthened her belief that she’d done the right thing — not only for herself, but also for her people.

Olaf walked over to Gabriele. “I hope the ladies were not too rough on you, Helga has served my family since I was little.” He looked her up and down. “Huh, didn’t think I would see that here.”

“They were fine, despite the language barrier.” She tracked his eyes and met them on their way back up. “See what?”

“That dress, it belonged to one of Helga’s daughters who grew alongside me.” Olaf said, smiling at her. “You make it look beautiful.”

“I see you are a verbal tactician as well as a military one,” Gabriele grinned. “Thank you.” A pause, and then, “I’m afraid you’ll have to guide me through this evening is there’s certain things I should be doing.”

Olaf extended his hand out towards Gabriele . “Well first is the festivities then when the priest arrives he will do the ceremony.

She took his hand and slipped her arm through his. The move was automatic; she’d done it a hundred times before when she was being escorted to some event or other, but there was a nameless difference here that sent a sudden shiver up her spine. “I suppose I should warn you now, since we’re on the subject: we may have to go through a ceremony more… identifiable by the nobility at some point as well.”

“That is for after the battle, to be honest I would prefer to enjoy this night instead of thinking how to placate the nobles.” He said with a smirk leading her to the makeshift dance circle.

“I won’t be dwelling on it.” She followed him to the circle. She wasn’t the greatest dancer — at least not where people could see. She’d always had to dance for functions, but those dances were not the same as what was happening here. This dancing was more akin to how she danced in the middle of the forest, often in the rain, and almost always to the chagrin of any assorted creatures in the area. Kicking up a fuss wasn’t likely to make any wildlife comfortable at the best of times. She tried to follow Olaf’s lead by force of habit, but soon found that there was not so much a lead as a flow, and that everyone was following everyone else.

The dancing and festivities went on for another hour, many jeers in the Volgar tongue were said to Olaf as he and Gabriele danced. Olaf’s eyes never left Gabriele’s, till a man in furs entered the tent, causing all of the Volgars within to stop and stand still in silence. He walked to the center of the tent, his milky white eyes staring towards Gabriele and Olaf.

Olaf looked at Gabriele’s “It’s time.”

Gabriele looked away from one of the other Volgar men, trying to remove the glare from her face. She was pretty sure she’d understood what he’d said, and was not entirely happy about it. Stil, she looked back at Olaf, where she’d been focused for most of the night. “I think I’m ready.”

Olaf grabbed her hand leading her to stand in front of the old man.

The man met them looking with milky white eyes. “As fate brought you into this world, so has it brought you together, the spirits have willed you to be joined in body and soul, to bring future people to protect their blessed land.”

He looked to Gabriele pointing a long bony finger towards her. “Do you swear by the spirits to join your souls and live and love as one?”

Gabriele wasn’t sure what all swearing by the spirits involved. But she did know that she had no intention of going back on her word, now, or ever, spirits, or no. So it was an easy answer. “With my whole heart.”

The man repeated it again in Volgar to Olaf who answered softly towards Gabriele saying in her tongue. “As long as the spirits allow me.” She smiled up at him as he then spoke loudly in Volgar, “I Do!” leading to cheers and jeers from the Volgar side of the crowd.

The old man took the pair's left hands, placing them together. “Then by the spirits let your souls be one!

Olaf then placed his right hand on Gabriele’s cheek and kissed her.

She hadn’t known what to expect, really. She’d never allowed herself time to be distracted by things like this, and even through the vows she’d agreed because it was an agreement. And Olaf wasn’t a bad choice. But then, the kiss! That unnamed shiver on her spine returned with a vengeance and she had to close her eyes because she wasn’t sure if she was spinning or if the room was and it was better to be rid of both just a for a few moments so she could focus. The problem was, focusing on the kiss just redoubled the effect, and she didn’t so much press into him as literally fall into his arms while she returned it.

Following the kiss even more cheer and music began to erupt through the tent, and of course more jeers from the Volgar side and a host of laughter.

Olaf looked down to Gabriele. “Now I am certain on my actions in the morn.”

“Oh? Only your actions in the morning, then?”

Olaf chuckled. “I will make sure to return to you that is all.”

“I’m going to hold you to that as well.”

Rolais, Elvhenen, Volgaro, Ryeongse, and 1 otherEskeland

Northward

Rendotius, 345 ATF

Lyrenz awoke to a frosty greeting from the spring morning. Though the new year had at last arrived, and with that the new campaigns of the Syrdish armies, the biting cold had not yet left Halland. The remnants of the snowstorm that had swept the land in the closing weeks of 344 ATF were still evident. Many trees were still cold and unmoving, the rest only beginning to be rejuvenated by the new spring. Lyrenz thought it a curious thing, and took to likening it to the state of the army. Many men were still sick or weary from the winter, others had begun teeming with life again, brought back by the thought of the coming campaign and the days upon days of marching that they now found themselves in.

Lyrenz, assigned to be with the huszars, found himself marching north, as had long been rumoured. While the main force under His Grace moved eastward, invoking memories of the past two years, a smaller force, put under the leadership of Count Jakob Zalan, advanced northward from Obersrath, and most of the huszars, including Ferenc’s company, had been assigned to the Count. With the beginning of spring, Jakob’s army moved with an energetic pace, departing Obersrath and marching along the Geber River, provoking the attention of those Hallish lords on the other side—Prince Konrad and Prince Frederick.

Rising from his bed, Lyrenz exited the warm comforts of his tent and took in the view for a brief, fleeting second. Ferenc’s huszars had camped in a small forest clearing, just ahead of the main army of Count Jakob. The surrounding trees shielded the camp from the outside meadows and fields, their normally still branches rustling occasionally when a gust of wind passed by, sending shivers down the young knight’s spine. Lyrenz looked up to the sky, saw that it was just barely dawn, and smiled. He had been growing accustomed to waking up around this hour, as it gave him time to organise his things before they had to go back on the march again, which took up the entire day as normal.

The huszars usually set up camp when the sun vanished, and since it was early spring, and the days were shorter, they would compensate for this by setting out at an earlier hour to cover more ground. Lyrenz was still adapting to the huszars and their methods. Whereas during winter the huszars had sat around Obersrath, spending their spoils in the city and foraging for more coin when necessary, now with the spring march they were fully on the hunt at all times. Riding ahead of the main force, they possessed a keen eye for all things valuable that Lyrenz lacked. In many ways perhaps, he was still learning, though it was a lesson he did not particularly wish to be taught.

Withdrawing back to his tent, Lyrenz donned his armour and clothing. He did not adorn himself with the full set of elaborate plate armour as usual. In the recent days, he had taken to a more comfortable style of clothing, simply donning a cuirass over his garments, which had been lined with fur to shield their wearer from the cold. There was little danger to be had during the marching, and the thought of real battle was still far off, especially since they hadn’t even crossed the Geber yet. Thus, for now, he kept to his comfortable riding gear, and saved his plate armour for another day.

Rummaging through his possessions in the tent, Lyrenz took a small brass box, marked with small engravings, then grasped at the handle of a small copper pot, which he also took. He exited the tent again, and surveyed his surroundings another time. He had not been the first to wake up. Some of the huszars had risen already. Dressed in their fine—or not so fine—kaftans, they stood or sat idly, waking themselves up bit by bit. A small fire had already been lit in the camp, as some of the men stood around it, warming themselves. Lyrenz walked over to the fire, attracting their attention, but he merely muttered a simple greeting before sitting down on his knees. He laid the copper pot on the ground, then opened the brass box, revealing what was inside: finely ground coffee.

Lyrenz had been introduced to the drink in Wyvern’s Rest, where it was a somewhat popular commodity. He had heard of it before many times, but it was only in the city that he drank it, where he became quite fond of the beverage. He treated it as a luxury, for it was quite expensive, and during the winter spent in Obersrath managed to come across a Hallish merchant who sold the prized beans. It took some trouble communicating with the man, but Lyrenz eventually succeeded in purchasing a good quantity, and had taken to drinking every few days or week. That morning was one such day.

Having had his squire Frytsche grind some of the coffee beans the night before, he laid down the brass box and copper pot on the ground, then returned to his tent to fetch two small cups and a flask of water. Returning to the fire, he first poured water into the copper pot, then the fine coffee powder, before hovering the pot over the small fire, bringing the mixture to a boil. Slowly, it rose, the top of the drink taking a foamy appearance, and when it looked like it was about to overflow Lyrenz removed it from the fire and poured the foam equally into the two cups, before again hovering the copper pot over the fire. He repeated this process a few times, until there was no more drink to boil, and the two cups were almost full.

Lyrenz laid the copper pot on the ground, then rose with the two cups in his hands and walked away, ignoring the strange looks the huszars had been giving him. He entered his squire’s tent, and with a quick kick he awoke Frytsche, who rose with a groan and a startled look, making a strange movement with his hand to signal for Lyrenz to go away. The young knight complied, and again stepped out into the open, taking in deep breaths of air and sipping at his cup of coffee. A minute later his squire arose from the tent, and Lyrenz offered him the cup of coffee that he held in his other hand. Frytsche took it, and together the two drank slowly, without saying a word.

More and more of the huszars had awoken. Their captain, Ferenc, rose from his tent, smoking pipe in his hand, as he struck a pose similar to that of Lyrenz sipping his coffee. Some of the men were already tending to their horses, armour or weapons, while the more higher ranking officers of the company had already set to delivering orders back and forth. Soon they would be on the ride again.

“Ah! Good day Sir!” Cried out one of the huszars in a mocking tone, and Lyrenz scowled, for he knew who that man was. He was dressed in a yellow kaftan and feathered hat and the man wore a thick moustache and a dark brown hair that reached down to his neck. He carried an almost perpetually arrogant expression on his face, and his hand rested on the pommel of his sabre as he tended to his steed, a light grey stallion, that Lyrenz thought bore some resemblances to its owner.

The man’s name was Lészek. Lészek was one of the higher ranking officers of the company, not an old man (though he was certainly older than Lyrenz), yet with years of experience in the tactics of the huszars. He was popular, but perhaps feared by the men, swinging his sabre wildly while walking around the camp, and always scowling with a menacing look, which he wore frequently. Yet though he loved such habits, since Lyrenz’s arrival Lészek had found a new affection, and that was pestering and belittling the young knight to no end. To Lészek Lyrenz must’ve surely represented something that he detested—knighthood, which he always spoke disparagingly of. It was for this that Lészek took great enjoyment in his new hobby, speaking to Lyrenz always with a mocking and taunting tone.

Lyrenz, for his part, had mostly ignored the man. From the beginning he had sparsely spoken with the huszars, always acting with a cold and lofty air around him, which did little to endear him to the company. When he was enticed into conversation with them, he adopted a tone of such scorn and aloofness that it had made him a very hated man in the company. He was aware of this, and he did not care. In his eyes, they deserved that tone with which he spoke.

“Sir, Sir!” Cried out another voice, and turning his eyes from the cup of coffee Lyrenz saw the easily recognisable and warm face of one of the other huszars, a man named Sólyom. His words made Lyrenz give a sudden frown.

Lyrenz was a man who found it easy to develop not just deep friendships with those around him, but also bitter rivalries. When meeting a man, he would think, evaluate the person he had just been introduced to, take mental notes of what he said and what he did, and by the end of the day it was likely that he had made up his mind on whether or not that man was bad or good. When he had made up his mind, the matter was practically set in stone, and it was quite difficult for him to change it.

Sólyom, meanwhile, was a man who confounded this system. At times he was a detestable little thing, at other instances he was a good conversation partner. On one day he would irritate Lyrenz so much that the knight was sure that Sólyom was bad, but the next day the two would engage in a fun little conversation, which left the young knight unsure of the man again. It had been going on like this for nearly a month now. There was a strange quality to that huszar, which had made Lyrenz find him both repulsive and charming, annoying and pleasant, and a friend and enemy at that.

“Me, Antal and Csaba are going hunting today.” Said Sólyom curtly, a strange smirk crossing his face. “Perhaps you’d like to come.” He suggested.

Lyrenz mulled the matter over, knowing full well why Sólyom had proposed it. The other night he had engaged in a conversation with the man over hunting, and their two wildly different interpretations of it. Lyrenz—raised like all nobles—always treated and spoke of hunting as a most noble sport and pastime, making flattering remarks over the qualities of his method of hunting par force. He then spoke belittlingly of Sólyom’s method (which was to say, hunting efficiently with bows, arrows and traps), almost mocking it during the conversation. He argued there could be no thrill or pleasure in it, to which Sólyom responded by saying that the pleasure in his efficient method of hunting was that he could have dinner later, which shut Lyrenz up for the rest of the night.

Now Sólyom was proposing to show Lyrenz his method of hunting, and the young knight pondered over the matter for a few seconds, taking another sip of his coffee. His squire Frytsche looked between him and Sólyom curiously, intrigued by the huszar’s offer, before he adopted a cold and aloof expression, almost as if he was laughing at the fact that the huszar had even proposed such a thing. To his surprise Lyrenz accepted.

They went hunting later that day. For morning and most of the afternoon they kept with the rest of the huszars, but when it was clear that they would set camp soon, Lyrenz, Sólyom and the two others went off into a nearby woodland to hunt. Adhering to the huszar method, which Lyrenz still did not consider to be ‘true’ hunting, they bagged a few hares and were prepared to ride back to the camp, only for Lyrenz to catch sight of a deer just moments before. He trailed it carefully and quietly, then struck it in the neck with an arrow, felling it instantly. The four returned to the camp with chipper spirits. When they came back, Lyrenz aided in skinning the animals they had caught, for he had experience in this, and then they feasted, revelling in the cooked meat, full of pride at their accomplishments. The young knight’s mood had brightened for the day, and again he pondered over Sólyom, who sat there with a bright face and sly smirk, making humorous remarks whenever he could, that strange quality shining in him again.

***
A week later, in the midst of the month of Iskrenil, the army of Count Jakob Zalan prepared to cross the Geber River. For the past few days the army had been locked in a peculiar standoff with the force of another Hallish lord—Prince Konrad of Gelbau-Kotzburg. Adhering strongly to the Proposal of Ulmefurt, which he had signed, the Prince was guarding the Geber River closely with his retainers and men-at-arms, a small army that numbered some 3,000 men, dwarfed by Jakob’s own force of 10,000.

Count Jakob had no wish to fight a bitter river crossing, and he wished even less to even engage in a proper battle with Prince Konrad, so while he kept a large part of his army to maintain the standoff with the Hallish force, he sent a smaller force further north along the river to construct a series of pontoon bridges, which would let him cross without much effort, and catch Konrad by surprise. They set to work, and within a day had fashioned a series of makeshift bridges, unbeknownst to the Hallish. The Syrds began crossing the next day. The huszars were the first to pass the river. Some companies were sent forward to scout the nearby countryside, but Ferenc’s company and a few others formed a sort of vanguard to watch over the crossing, in case Prince Konrad became suddenly aware of what was happening, and attacked the Syrds with all his might.

Lyrenz, riding with Ferenc’s company as always, watched calmly as columns of men crossed the three small boat bridges. He paid close attention to their banners, and along with his squire Frytsche had been pointing out the numerous companies and nobles that were crossing, recognising them just from their flags. When it came to the third hour of the crossing, however, there was a company of men that neither Lyrenz nor his squire recognised. They carried a curious looking banner, and the men themselves were more intriguing, wearing flamboyant doublets in a style that reminded Lyrenz of Bartin de Marnont, one of the King’s many knights and aides, and a Rolesian at that. The men held arquebusiers in their hands, resting the middle of the firearm on their shoulders. All two-hundred of them or so possessed a matchlock, which only intrigued Lyrenz further. He kept on observing as more companies crossed the bridge, his eyes occasionally darting back to that small battalion of arquebusiers.

“‘O are they?” Asked one of the huszars curiously, his mind also focused on that company of arquebusiers. Ferenc, who as captain of the company was much more connected with high command than any of the others including Lyrenz, opened his mouth to respond.

“Rolesian matchlocks. ‘Is Grace brought ‘em in during the winter. Led by a…’Eynaurd or something. Peculiar lot. Nothin’ else to ‘em though.” He said loudly, his gaze turning back to the pontoon bridges. His words eased Lyrenz, who smiled proudly at having identified their clothing as Rolesian, though he flaunted it to no one. He too looked to the boat bridges again, his eyes jumping from man to man as he watched them cross.

Prince Konrad could not be fooled for too long. Eventually his scouts caught wind of the situation, and the first skirmishes were already beginning to break out between them and the huszars. The Hallish Prince and his army, which had been guarding a crossing a few miles south, rushed northward, forming up for battle. Yet Count Jakob’s force outnumbered the Hallish more than three to one, and Count Jakob had no intention to risk his men in a potentially costly battle. Sending a messenger into no man’s land, he requested a parley.

Konrad accepted. He could already see where the wind was blowing, and he knew his men did not have much chance against the far more numerous Syrds. He rode forward into the rolling hills and meadows to meet with Count Jakob. One of his servants bore the banner of House Verstenfeld and of Gelbau-Kotzburg, the flag laying motionless and idle, for the wind was not strong enough for the banner to flutter. Count Jakob met him half an hour later, his own servants bearing the banner of House Zalan and of House Kristoberg. The two men were dressed in their finest armour, an extravagant show of their respective power, but it reflected little on the actual state of their two armies.

His cold and aloof expression betraying his own anxiety, Count Jakob grimaced as he gazed at Prince Konrad. The Hallishman himself gave off a stern look, as he used his right hand to fiddle with the reins of his horse, while his left twitched nervously. He sat in silence for a moment, the only noise heard being the occasional grunt from their horses. It was Konrad who made the first remark, his lips curling into an anxious smile, as he opened his mouth to say the first words.

“A fine day to make battle, no?” He began, in Kostuan.

“I would rather we not make battle at all today, Your Grace.” Shot back Jakob, not in Kostuan but in Hallish, which caught the Prince and his servants off-guard—they had not expected the Count to speak their tongue.

“But alas we must. You have marched north, and now I see the aim of your army, and His Highness. You are here to uproot us all: our lands, our titles, our estates. The Greatest wills me to stop you.” Spat the Prince in Hallish, a bitter tone in every word he spoke. The Syrdish count only frowned.

“Has the King or the Kiralstág ever declared you a traitor? Have we ever declared your lands forfeit? Your blood attainted? Have we taken up arms against your, or your allies, those who signed that proposal?” Retorted Jakob, quite sure of his words.

“You march an army into my lands!”

“And I will be gone in a week. I, and His Grace Duke Martyn, seek only to deliver justice on those most wicked of lords, who did declare themselves to be independent and sovereign from the King. My army marches to Leuchstal, not to Kotzburg.”

“Your war has brought nothing but suffering to Halland. I only aim to keep the peace, which your King has failed to do.”

“Which the Duke of Korbek has failed to do. I should not have to remind you of that, Your Grace. I ask you this: is this how peace is kept in Halland? By marching to meet me with an army three times smaller than mine, and throwing your men into a needless bloody battle, only for me to continue on my way to Eltenhof?”

“You are so sure of victory?” Questioned Konrad, but Jakob brushed aside his words.

“I offer you peace. Return with your men to Trübenach, Kotzburg, Schberön, it does not matter to me. Return, and I will guarantee that I will be out of your lands in a week. And I can give you a guarantee, backed of course by His Highness, that your lands will not be…how is it you said…ah. Uprooted. If you will not accept these terms, then at least forgo battle now in exchange for another day.” Said the Count and Konrad mulled over his words—there was indeed little point in battle today. Yet he felt honourbound to do so.

“I will consider it.” He answered, some truth in the words he had spoken, but an air of uncertainty surrounding them. Count Jakob squinted, himself uncertain of whether he had succeeded or not. Yet when Konrad made it clear that the parley was over, he departed, anxiety again attacking his mind, as he pondered on whether he had been too harsh in his words, or had not said them properly, or had delivered the wrong message entirely.

Small skirmishes between Prince Konrad’s force and the Syrdish army continued for the better part of the day. Ultimately the Prince consulted his commanders, and as afternoon approached, and the time for battle having long passed, Konrad’s army retreated towards Trübenach, having sustained relatively light casualties. Jakob, for his part, marched northward with full haste, and departed Konrad’s lands after eight days.

Rolais, Namalar, Eskeland, and Straulechen

MAP UPDATED (April 17th, 2022)

Tylos

Tylos Nations

Tylos Counties

Tylos Resources

Tylos Climates


Sokos
Sokos Nations

Sokos Counties

Sokos Resources

Sokos Climates

Arkonos Map


Read factbook

Rolais and Eskeland

The Southern Defence Pact

Written with The Pink Seas

Heavenly Palace, Tajima

Emperor Kiyoshi was sitting on his throne, waiting for an answer from his courier regarding the invitation he had sent to the leaders of The Pink Seas about coming over to discuss future plans. The emperor had, for a while, thought of forming an alliance with the Pink Seas in a move to secure hegemony in the southern part of Tylos. His fear of the resurging savoset, the ikori and now the avernai, drove him to take the decision.

After an hour of waiting the courier finally arrived, with a letter in hand, it was signed by one of the leaders of the Pink Seas. The couriers handed it over to the emperor who took it and gave it a good look. Someone by the name of Yama Daitan would come over as a representative, she was one of the citylords, and would arrive in two weeks time. More than enough to make the preparations. The emperor had barely any knowledge of who ruled that country as he was more interested in the politics of the mainland, but maybe it was time for him to learn a bit more about his neighbours.

The emperor closed the letter and ordered his servants to gather everything necessary to make the preparations, including a small fireworks show for the delegation, a staple entertainment in Tokawa, usually used during important festivities, it would be used for the first time in front of a foreign delegation and with good reason.

From one of the seats lined along the carpet that led to the emperor’s throne rose one of the guardians, he approached the emperor to voice his concern over the recent incident in Harima and how the perpetrators could cause problems for the delegation on their way to Tajima. The emperor was more than aware of the incident, “Do not worry about it Haruto, I had Guardian Minoru dispatched over there, he will take care of the problem in the meanwhile, but if you are this concerned about our image, I will send some members of the Kangun to keep watch and accompany them all the way over here.”

“Thank you.” Said Haruto bowing before returning to his seat to await the end of the court

—----------------

Yama had had a rough trip. She had arranged to visit Tokawa as a representative after talking it out with some of the other citylords, who were too preoccupied with the war to care much about a small nation on the continent. The voyage out of the isles wasn’t pretty: a few storms and constant fear of being spotted by Pink Seasian enemies’ ships made it hard to sleep. But, eventually the Ship managed to get past the islands and soon the land of the continent was visible over the horizon.

“We are some kilometres off where we should be.” Yama noted when the coast became closer.

“Yes, ma’am” the captain acknowledged, “We ended up going up north more than expected trying to dodge Tsukian fishing boats to avoid detection. We’ll have to go south following the coast”.

The ship continued with land on sight, and eventually they started seeing more and more trading ships and fishing boats, most making their way in or out of a city that could be spotted in the distance. Big walls surrounded what looked like the ceiling of a majestic palace. On the docks, countless vessels docked and left, among them many military ones. Some others made their way through channels that headed further into the city through rivers.

The Pink Seasian delegation made their way to the docks, where they were guided to a place where they could anchor themselves.

The Kangun led by one of the guardians, Uyou, the guardian of Nakai, were there waiting for them. They would serve as their escort all the way to Tajima where they would finally meet the emperor. As they descended their ship one by one Uyou greeted them, welcoming them to the country and thanking them for coming until he saw who he assumed was Yama, “You must be Yama right? I bid you welcome to the country” He said bowing in a cordial way .

Yama bowed herself, “thank you for the warm welcome. I am, indeed, Yama. Who might you be if you don’t mind me asking?”

“I am Uyou Totsuka, one of the guardians of Tokawa and loyal protector of his heavenly majesty. I was sent to receive and escort you and your entourage to the capital. We had transports arranged for this. Accommodations have also been arranged for you in Tajima. We can speak of it more once we are there. I would prefer if we kept talking to a minimum as on orders of the emperor, we are to depart as soon as possible.” Uyou show them the way to the carriages. They were of similar construct to the ones one could see in Sokos but with a more Tokawan look. Instead of wheels it had horses. Anyone could easily confuse it for a litter.

Yama had never seen any carriages like that before. She commented nothing, though, and got on the carriage along with those accompanying her. "How far is it, Tajima?"

"Quite far, and we have to travel up through the mountains, but thankfully the roads have been given maintenance so there won't be any problems along the way. Now if there is nothing else we might depart." Said Uyou. He gave the signal to the carriage master to depart and so the small convoy of carriages departed towards Tajima, the Kangun on the side of each to protect them.

The convoy would pass through the middle of Nakai and any other village or town they had to pass by, at orders of the emperor. It was a move to show the foreign dignitaries, the grandeur and beauty of Tokawa, but to the guests this would seem as nothing more than just the best way to get to Tajima. Yama and her delegation were able to observe the diversity of the Tokawan countryside, from jungles to deserts and from deserts to grasslands in the more rarer areas, Tokawa had much to offer. The many villages and towns of the country varied in architecture and its citizens' clothing too. A representation of the many cultures that inhabited Tokawa.

—----------------

Many days later, Tajima

After a long and safe trip through the Tokawan countryside and one rough trek through the mountains, the convoy arrived at the gates of the city. The gate guards opened the doors for the convoy after Uyou gave them the order and they were able to proceed to the palatial complex where the emperor was located. The streets were lined up with people who came to welcome Yama and her entourage. The only ones in the country who were made aware of it.

At the complex were the rest of the guardians, except for Minoru who was occupied with more important matters elsewhere in the country. They all welcomed Yama and the rest. All introduction and formalities done, Uyou led them all inside to the first part of the complex to finally meet the emperor. The halls were decorated with tapestries depicting the history of the country, the main hall was supported by green columns gilded with gold and at the very end was the heavenly throne of the emperor, made fully of gold, other materials used for the smaller details to distinguish the features.

The delegation approached the throne and the emperor stood up to greet them, ”Welcome, welcome! Welcome to my beautiful country. I hope your trip was pleasant and you were able to enjoy the many beauties that my country has to offer. I believe you must be Yama?” Said Emperor Kiyoshi, bowing to greet them and proceeding to shake everyone's hands.

Yama bowed her head slightly before answering. “Your Heavenly Majesty'' she said, following the indications Uyou and the others had given her on royal customs, “I am, indeed, Yama, citylord of Karafuru. You clearly are Emperor Kiyoshi. I am very pleased to meet you. I come to talk to you as a representative of the Pink Seasian Commonwealth, and bearing gifts”. One of her companions unveiled a small detailed model of the Bōkensha, a legendary Pink Seasian ship Yama herself had sailed in years before.

The emperor was more than happy to receive her gift, he himself being a collector of unique items, he was pleased to add another one to his collection and none other than of Pink Seasian craftsmanship, “Thank you for this wonderful gift, we ourselves also had gifts prepared for your delegation, we wouldn’t want to be bad hosts but it will have to wait until the end of this gracious meeting. But setting that matter aside for the moment, I believe we have some important things to talk about. The whole reason you are here. If you would follow us into the conference room, we might be able to talk about it better.

The emperor, followed by the guardians, showed the Pink Seasian delegation to the conference room. The room was on the right side of the complex, they had to go through an open corridor to be able to get there, decorated with flowers on the sides. The conference room however was more impressive than a mere corridor: the walls were decorated with maps of the country and of its neighbours, in the middle of Tylos itself. More columns held the building in place and finally in the middle of the room the centrepiece, a round table made of the finest wood, along with the chairs. One of the chairs stood from the other for being made of gold, which was where the emperor sat.

They all sat on their seats, the table divided, on one side the Pink Seasian delegation and on the other the emperor and the guardians. Some of the guardians remained standing in the corners of the room to stand guard, but also to free up seats for the foreign delegation.

“This is much better, I believe we can formally begin our meeting now. Once more I thank you for coming, as you all know, Tylos is a very treacherous continent, different races vying for its control. The savoset might not be anymore, but one never knows, the Elotomeki are unpredictable and now the avernai with their dragon emperor. I fear for the security of the south. That is why I believe this meeting was in order. We are the two biggest powers in the south and I believe you, like us, don't wish to see the south threatened by these people.” Said the emperor in a serious tone.

“The Commonwealth has previously established defensive pacts and alliances with other Tylosian powers in order to safeguard our interests and protect our people. I do believe that your empire would pose a good ally, yet I feel the need to confirm a few things before we continue this topic”, she answered, now seemingly much less relaxed than she looked like in the throne room. “Some of my peers have expressed concern at your rapid expansion and wish to know what are your naval ambitions. As you may be aware, our economy and military is primarily based on the seas, and so we wish to know of your goals in the area”.

“I see… Well, I believe there is no need to worry. In that case, our priorities, with our navy, are to safeguard our waters. We have no naval ambitions, ours are mostly on land. That is why your help on the seas would be essential for us, and we can give you a hand on land should it be required.”

“That’s certainly a relief for most of us. It can indeed be extremely beneficial for both to excel in the area the other lacks, though it also means that assisting the other on the part each of us is lacking might be a difficult affair”. Yama played with her hair nervously and continued. “The other question I have concerns our ability to communicate news to each other. Given that your capital is located far inland and doesn’t seem to be accessible by ships through rivers, I’m afraid any quick notice of any of our needs or news might arrive mostly late. Do you have any propositions to attempt to fix this issue?”

“That shouldn’t be a problem. Every city has a guardian, they are the most powerful people in the country after me, they are allowed to make their own decisions accordingly, so should a time like that come, they will act accordingly in the meanwhile while I receive word of it. We have had this system for centuries and it hasn’t failed us yet. For example, Uyou here is the guardian of Nakai, should you send a message there, he is who you must give it to. He will know what to do.”

“It seems both our nations have more similarities than I thought of,” Yama laughed lightly. “It seems, then, my main worries are resolved. What are the terms of this pact you propose?”

“Yes, quite, I am glad there is someone else we share similarities with. But as for what I propose, that would be an alliance, commercial and military. I see great benefit in it. Both our nations can come together to defend the south from any threats. That is my vision, so what do you say?”

“Is this an all-encompassing alliance, or just a defensive one? Should we expect your support were we to attack a nation ourselves? It is currently highly unlikely, though we can never rule out the possibility”

“An all-encompassing alliance of course, we are ready to defend our allies and join them should any conflict arise.”

“Excellent. If you don’t mind, then, I’d like to take some more of your time to write it up somewhere so we can make it official.”

“Of course, oh and allow me to bring some paper, Gidayuu, bring us the scroll and some ink.” Gidayuu stood up from his seat and went to the next room where supplies and other objects were kept, and came back with ink and the scroll, it had in it words already written for the occasion. “Perfect.” Said the emperor, “Here have a look at it, and if everything is of your and that of your delegation’s liking, then you may proceed to sign it, you and those who wish to.” Kiyoshi handed Yama the scroll.

She read three or so times and deemed it enough, and so she grabbed the feather and noted down her name besides the emperor’s. She then bowed her head slightly towards him again. “This has been a great meeting, your heavenly majesty. I hope this alliance leads to prosperous times for both our people”.

“Yes, I do hope too, now, before the guards show you to you rooms for the night, allow me to present you with our gifts.” The emperor clapped and from the door came in a few servants carrying in the different gifts, “This have been chiselled by out most professional chisellers. These are statues, made of our finest marble, of the different spirits in our religion. Each one brings a different fortune, the one you are being given represents victory. I do have a few more statues as gifts so that you can bring them to your fellow citylords.”

Yama bowed again, slightly thankful now that actual negotiations ended and they were back to formalities, where she felt more comfortable. ”I kindly thank you for these gifts. They look beautiful and I’m certain my fellow leaders will pride themselves with having one too”.

With the negotiations over, the emperor proceeded to retire to his quarters. Yama and her delegation were escorted by one of the guardians to the quarters they would stay for the night before departing once more towards Nakai and finally back to the Pink Seas. And so the Southern Tylos Defence Pact was born.

Ryeongse and Straulechen

Post by Supercommiestan suppressed by Uyuti.

Supercommiestan

Why are the messages here so long?

Onimiski

Children of Kisemanito
Founding Post

From the Imperial city of Ezkelon rode a party of ten old and wizened imperial scholars, and one hundred and one soldiers for their protection. Charting a path north from the city was easy at first, as decades of Imperial rule had pacified the countryside and civilized its peoples. But the further north they rode the poor the roads became, going from paved stone to unpacked dirt all too quickly. The people grew similarly wild, eyeing the Imperials with suspicion as they came past their meager villages and hamlets. Soon permanent villages became a thing of distant memory as they rode north into the Onimiskian plains, and it was here that their true destination lay.

Here the people did not build houses out of stone and wood, instead living a nomadic life in tents made from animal skin and hide. There was no unifying force among the nineteen disparate tribes, the only commonality being their religion and the priesthood, the Thunder Shamans. Horses were revered among the dozens of tribes and bands of Onimiski, bred for speed and endurance above all else.

Such was the skill of both horse and rider, that when the Imperials were peppered by a few arrows from a pair of outriders, that the attackers were easily able to lose the heavy Imperial cavalry before they had even organized. The leader of the cavalry, an aged Imperial named Gren, threw his helmet to the ground and shouted curses to the plains for minutes on end before the head scholar, a man older than Gren by a few decades named Hekan, put his hand on the raging commander in an attempt to calm his rage. He spoke gently,

“Easy Gren, easy. You won’t catch them now by throwing a tantrum.” Gren took the words to heart and calmed down, collecting his dented helmet and calling for his horse. He mounted and and spoke to Hekan with barely contained rage,

“Three weeks out from Ezkelon, and the only sign I’ve seen that these lands haven’t been abandoned by the gods is a few arrows fired by children, who my men can’t even catch!” He ignored the grumbles of his soldiers and leaned down in the saddle, “Why are we still here Hekan? What reason compels you to not turn around and end this folly?” Hekan straightened his posture, standing tall as he said,

“I had never taken you for a deserter or a coward, Commander. The very future of the northern Empire on the line, and you want to turn and run back to Ezkelon?” Now it was Gren who stood tall, his armored, gray feathered figure towering over the feeble scholar,

“Now I know you are wise enough to not question my honor, so I will not question the soundness of your mind, or your ability to lead this expedition. I do not suggest we return to the Emperor in failure because our journey has become difficult, I suggest we return because the Maskwas have failed to meet on our agreed terms. We’ve been riding a week longer than we were supposed to, and still we’ve seen no evidence of our hosts. How do we know that they still mean to make good on their promises, or that they haven’t been swept away by another one of these infernal tribes?”

Hekan had begun to speak when they both noticed that usually wind ravaged plains had become eerily quiet. What confused Hekan concerned Gren, and he began to draw his sword as he ordered his men to stand ready. The heavily armed and armored Imperial soldiers moved quickly in forming a defensive circle around the scholars and diplomats, but as they moved they noticed they had already been surrounded by a war party of Onimiskian tribals, each warrior had picked out an individual soldier and trained their bow on them, leaving the entire Imperial delegation frozen with their weapons still in their scabbards.

As Hekan’s expression turned grim and Gren’s turned furious, the leader of the war party presented himself. Riding a red maned stallion covered in war paint , the leader’s feathers were black and the cloth he wore was made from the finest of animal pelts. Long streaks of red and white paint covered his body and discolored his feathers, the war paint granting him a disturbing visage. His bow was slung over shoulder and was decorated with dozens of trophies taken from worthy enemies; from broken talons to Lopexi finger bones. The tomahawk at his side was covered in similar trophies.

The leader jumped from his horse and motioned for his warriors to lower their bows. They did so reluctantly as he stood before Hekan and looked down at the scholar, sizing the old Imperial up. Hekan was not intimidated, and he spoke very slowly in Imperial Avernic,

“We…” Hekan circled his hands around at his retinue, “Come to you…” he pointed to the Onimiskian and mimicked walking with his talons, “in peace.” He locked his hands together and eagerly stared at the warrior. Most of the war party stared in bored silence at the Imperials while a few who rode close to their leader laughed openly at Hekan’s display. Their leader blinked a few times before speaking eloquently,

“You… you are aware I can speak Imperial Avernic, right?” Gren could not see the face of Hekan at that moment, but he could tell the old scholar's beak would be stammering for a response after such a foolish speech. Hekan rallied though, and he spoke in a much more respectful and dignified tone,

“Apologies sir, I had no clue. I hope you will forgive me for my foolishness.” The warrior was silent for several seconds, his gaze burrowing into Hekan as he verbally prostrated before him. Then he laughed, and rode forward, ignoring the worried and stern glances from the Imperial riders. He held his hand out to Hekan and shook it eagerly as he said,

“My name is Sakowew, of the Maskwa people. I welcome you to our lands, and I pray you hear our words and offer well.” Hekan slowly took Sakowew’s hand and spoke carefully,

“Our Emperor Rak'kretai Kalanuta Ark'adis sends his greetings to your proud people. He hopes that this meeting will be for the benefit of the Empire and all its peoples.” Sakowew nodded slightly as he mounted his horse again and spoke,

“That will depend on if you choose to heed our words. But for now you will follow me and my riders to our encampment. The ride from the Imperial city is long, and you must be tired after such a trek.” None among the Imperials could dispute Sakowew’s claim, and they all followed the natives closely. They followed as they were led well off the beaten path, what was once well packed dirt became wild growing grass, trampled slightly by the combined party. They rode for hours with seemingly no direction until they came before a ridge, and creating it they looked down onto a large nomadic camp.

Hundreds of tipis and tents stretched over the valley with thousands of Onimiskian tribespeople milled around their camp. Women gathered around communal fires and basins, cooking food and cleaning clothes while talking between themselves. Children ran between the tents with their dogs, playing games and earning the ire of their mothers. The men of the camp were engaged in a variety of tasks, some watching and patrolling the outskirts, others keeping watch over the horses, and some gathered in groups of their fellows to discuss and plan raids on their neighbors.

Gren surveyed the camp and came to a thoroughly disappointing conclusion. He had counted, at most, six hundred shelters in the valley. He assumed an equal number of warriors would come from each lodge, and in his own estimate he believed that no more than a thousand fighting men had gathered here. Hardly enough to threaten even the weakest of border posts, let alone disrupt the entire status quo of the north. Gren rode forward until he was side by side with Sakowew, and he spoke disapprovingly,

“This… this is it? I would’ve expected you to gather more tents, more fires, more warriors if you wanted us to take your bid seriously. You’ve hardly enough men here to raid a pantry, nevermind taking the mantle of the Northern Warden.” Sakowew turned away from Gren and towards the camp. He pondered on the Imperials words before speaking,

“What you see is not all of our people. The Maskwa have brought maybe two thirds of all our bands, while the other four only brought half of their bands. The distances we ride are long, and not all of our wayward brothers are able to gather in time for a meeting. Once a majority has arrived, the latecomers will simply have to abide by our decision. Though not all of the great tribes have come to gather here, I know that all suffer greatly under the Sihkos, and with Imperial support they will support the Maskwa as the new Warden.”

Gren said nothing and rode along in silence, wondering of the ultimate fate of these people. He did not ponder for long before they arrived at the center of the camp, and the great wooden lodge that formed its heart.

The great lodge was set atop a large hill and dominated the landscape of tents and tipis that stretched beneath it. The wooden walls were lined with the dried hides of a hundred different beasts, all stitched together to form a coherent whole. Sakowew bid for Hekan and Gren to dismount their horses, a Lopexi captive turned servant exiting from the lodge and taking the reins to their horses, while another led the rest of the Imperials to the edge of the camp to set their own tents and rest.

Inside the lodge the leaders of a dozen differing bands had gathered, and old rivalries and grudges had risen to the surface, and more than one brawl had broken out before and during the Imperials' arrival. Those who broke up the grudges and tempered the egos of the band leaders were the Thunder Shamans, the unofficial priests of the Onimiskian peoples. The disparate tribes each spoke their languages and held their own unique ceremonies, and it was given to the Thunder Shamans to act as liaisons and ambassadors between them all. Each leader present had brought their Shamans, to act as translators and as arbiters.

The entrance of Sakowew and the Imperials prompted the gathered chiefs to calm themselves, and they separated from their rivals, grumbling their discontent to their Shamans. Sakowew and ignored them and made to present himself to a white feathered elder seated at the far end of the lodge. It was his lodge that they all met in, and it was him that called the Imperials to attend this meeting. The elder was Nixkamich, long time Chief of the Maskwa peoples and previous favorite to be chosen as the Northern Warden. While his last bid had failed when he was a younger and more energetic leader, he was now wise though trailed by age, and he leaned heavily on the arm of his Shaman, the blind and brown feathered Matwau.

Sakowew stared at the blind Shaman as he approached Nixkamich, taking the tomahawk from his side and holding it before him then kneeling before the elder and speaking,

“Father, I have done as you asked and brought the Imperials into our lands.” Nixkamich said nothing, he simply nodded and raised his left talon to send his son away. Matwau whispered into the elder’s ear, and Sakowew grumbled something before noticing an odd arrival seated atop brightly colored blankets. He approached and spoke in the tongue of the Maskwa, and the Shaman sat beside the young leader translated for him,

“Greetings, Chatan. I had not expected to see the Akecheta gather with us. Where is your father, does he intend to lend us his support in our endeavor?” Chatan shook his head slowly before replying,

“No Sakowew, my father is far from here. He does not know this meeting was called. My band and I were hunting with Ayimâsis when he was told of it. I had thought it best to go with him, though if I am intruding I will go.” He made to stand, but the elderly voice and hand of Nixkamich bid him to sit. When the elder spoke the lodge went silent as everyone hanged on the words of Nixkamich.

“Let him stay. We will need the Akecheta to ride with us if we want this confederation to succeed. We will need all the tribes, if we hope to survive.” Nixkamich rose slowly, taking the arm of Sakowew to balance himself. Once on his feet he let his voice fill the lodge as he proclaimed,

“With the arrival of my son, the majority of the Maskwa people have gathered, and I would say that we can begin. My sincerest thanks to all those who have gathered here today, and especially to our Imperial guests, the representatives of our Great Father Rak’Kretai Kalanuta Ark'adis. I will speak plainly to you, honored quests. We have asked you to come here because we believe that the Warden of the North Wind, Ahanu Sihkos, to be unworthy of his position and the trust of the Great Father.

“And now I will ask you, wise elder, why our most glorious and mighty Emperor should strip the honorable Ahanu Sihkos of his position as the Warden of the North?” Sakowew translated the Imperials response for his father. Nixkamich leaned forward, the confusion in his eyes fading as cold determination replaced it. He spoke slowly, not out of senility but instead prestige, and Sakowew did his best to imitate his fathers regal tone as he translated the speech,

“For decades and centuries, our people have been preyed upon and stolen by slavers from the iron ring of the four great cities of Lopexi. They’ve taken advantage of us, because there was never a coalition great enough to challenge them. There was never a Warden who could unite the tribes against this evil. The Sihkos are too weak and decadent to unite our people. We can form such an alliance. We can drive the slavers from our lands and save our people, and we can safeguard the northern plains for the Great Father. The Maskwa will do this for the Empire, but we need assurances that the Great Father will know that we only act in his interest.” Sakowew finished speaking his fathers words, and Hekan spoke hesitantly, almost sorrowfully,

“Unfortunately, the Emperor will send you no official support until you can claim to represent the interests of the majority of the tribes. Until then, He will consider Ahanu Sihkos to be the rightful Warden of the North.” Sakowew translated for the whole tent, and shouts and threats rose from the crowd like an angry tide. More than one Onimiskian present had placed their talons on their tomahawks before Sakowew calmed them. Hekan rose to his feet and spoke again, this time facing the whole of the great lodge,

“However, our most glorious Emperor has many concerns, and as such will be unable to spare any men or material to reinforce his current Warden. If you were to unite the majority of your people and diminish the current Warden, the Emperor would recognize the elder Nixkamich as the legal and rightful Warden.” Conversation spread throughout the lodge like fire, and only the booming voice of Sakowew silenced them. Nixkamich rose and leaned on Matwau, his voice unbowed by his age.

“Then it will be so. In the past our people have formed Confederations to unite against enemies that threatened all peoples, and I believe the threats of the slavers and our own Warden warrants a new Confederation. What say you, my fellows?” The very moment each leaders Shaman finished whispering Nixkamich’s words, each one jumped to his feet and spoke in favor of Confederation. Unanimously it was agreed, and unanimously was Nixkamich elected as the First Chief, the first among equals in this endeavor.

“We must also nominate a War Chief, who will lead our combined warriors against our foes. Does anyone have any candidates?” Matwau lowered Nixkamich back onto his blankets and spoke for the first time, his beak spreading wide into a smile as he spoke,

“I would nominate the Imperial Commander Gren, to serve as our War Chief.” Outrage followed, and if Matwau had eyes to see he would have seen more than one angry gesture and threat hurled towards him. One of the leaders, a Mahikan named Anakausuen spoke the loudest and shouted,

“He knows nothing of our ways and our traditions, much less our ways of war!” Matwau smiled again. This was the response he had hoped for.

“And that is why he will make for the perfect War Chief. The Sihkos and the slavers will know what to expect from us if we elect one of our own to the position, and how best to crush us. But Gren is an expert on the Imperial ways of war, and that is something no one will expect. If we move fast enough and with enough shock, we will destroy them before they have time to rally and adapt.” The anger subsided and grudgingly Gren was voted in as the Confederations War Chief, commander of all warriors the leaders had gathered. The bewildered Imperial was led from his seat near to the entrance of the lodge and sat beside Nixkamich on his left, where Matwau had graciously vacated his previous seat. Once Gren made himself comfortable, or as comfortable as he could manage under the circumstances, Nixkamich spoke again, his voices power beginning to wane as his energy fled from him,

“Let us seal this confederation in the traditional way. Bring out the pipe.”

Nixkamich took the first puff of the pipe, as was customary. He had called for this meeting, they had met in his lodge and they had elected him First Chief of this confederation. He inhaled long and deeply and when he unleashed the smoke it danced with the smoke from the central fire, the smokes merging as they scattered out the lodge and to the winds. Nixkamich passed the pipe to Gren, who as War Chief would take the next puff. Instead he held up his hand to the elder and politely spoke,

“No, thank you. I don’t smoke.” Shouts of outrage erupted throughout the lodge. They did not understand the words he spoke, but they knew what he had said by his hand alone. One warrior had even made to draw his tomahawk before Sakowew stood and spoke for the deeply confused Imperial.

“Peace my brothers, peace. Our War Chief is new to our culture, he cannot expect to know all that we know. He must be given time to learn, time to fully become one of us.” After a few tense moments the warriors lowered their weapons and grumbled acceptance of the explanation. Sakowew moved quickly across the lodge and sat next to Gren, speaking quickly in Imperial Avernic,

“The pipe is sacred to all tribes, it’s one of the few things we can all agree to. We smoke to seal contracts, to bless marriages, to honor confederations. To reject the pipe is the gravest insult among all our people. I suggest you take it and smoke.” He passed the pipe to Gren, and the Imperial gingerly took the pipe and took a small puff, quickly coughing and sending smoke spilling from his beak. This mollified the Onimisikians, and the pipe was passed around to all present without further incident.

With the final formal acts of Confederation sealed, the leaders vacated the lodge and announced the preceding to their gathered peoples. Any misgivings were quickly drowned in a tide of celebration, and a great festival was prepared, with a large central area cleared for a massive bonfire.

As night fell the valley came alive with the sounds of drums and dancing, as the Onimiskian peoples celebrated their new Confederation. Men and women had painted their clothes and feathers in a hundred different colors and danced around the fire with bells and jewelry hung from them, their singing a prayer to the great Thunderbirds that prowled the skies of the north freely. The Imperials sat to the side of the clearing, processing the day's events. Hekan turned slowly to Gren, who examined a tomahawk given to him by a warrior earlier in the day. He spoke slowly,

“Tacit support and advice. Not becoming a bloody warlord in overthrowing the Warden of the North.” At the absurdity of the situation, Hekan could only laugh much to Gren’s rage. He rallied quickly and spoke somberly,

“For better or for worse, we have thrown in ours, and perhaps the Empire’s, lot in with the Maskwan Confederation. Either we will help it succeed or we will help it fall, but we are a part of this, the same as the rest of them. The sooner we accept that the sooner our mission will be resolved, in triumph or ruin.”

Before Gren could speak, the clear night sky quickly turned clouded, covering the light of the moon with a deep rolling sound of thunder. While the Imperials rose quickly and made for their tipi, the Onimiskians instead turned to the east, where flashes of light frequently broke the pitch black horizon. They began to fall to their knees, prayers quietly falling from their beaks as rain began to fall and a mighty, furious screech broke the steady booms of the thunder.

A giant Thunderbird appeared above the encampment, breaking the clouds with the flap of its wings and revealing its glory in the light of the uncovered moon. Its feathers were a stark and pale white, and lightning rolled over its body so quickly the creature seemed to be formed from an over moving tide of thunder. The tribespeople were euphoric at the sight of one of their living gods, the appearance was interpreted as Kisemanito’s blessing over the Confederation.

Though none would say it aloud, the assembled tribal Chiefs each knew it would take more than a little divine favor to succeed in uniting their people once and for all.

Uyuti, Kul akeris, The Pink Seas, Ryeongse, and 1 otherEskeland

Voices: Part I

3k-Word Founding Post

Sorahnpu, Ivory Palace, Rachya’s Chambers

It was a long night for Dhoyanha. She lay in her silk bed, staring up at the stone ceiling, idly eyeing the fuzzy shapes her eyes made out of the ceiling play mock battles against one another.

The worst part was that it was completely quiet, and the air was good too. It would’ve been the perfect night for Dhoyanha to reconquer some sleep from her long nights as Rachya, running errands and directing troops to posts. Her physician had grown increasingly distressed at Dhoyanha’s sleeplessness and urged her to at least get six hours per day. Although that apparently wasn’t ideal, it was better than two hours—or none at all.

The moon was still in sight, which was good. That meant it wasn’t too late into the night. Dhoyanha turned her head on her wooden pillow, her long, jet-black hair sprayed all over the place, not tied to a fixed place as it would be when she was properly dressed. As she turned, she felt her spiraling horns continue to touch nothing, thanks to the engineering of the pillow allowing clearance for her head no matter the angle. The azure glow of the moon cast everything in the room with its signature hue, as if everything were drowning beneath the waves of the White Ocean.

An experience she felt all too familiar with.

Not that Dhoyanha had actually drowned. She had only ever seen the ocean twice. The sheltered life of the crown princess prevented her from seeing much outside of the Ivory Palace grounds, let alone Sorahnpu itself.

No, Dhoyanha suffered from bouts of drowning, as she could cruelly call it, even while on dry land. She had always been a sickly girl growing up, which gave her cautious father all the more reason to keep her on palace grounds so that her only friends were guards, servants, and advisors. She always found herself coughing more than she laughed, or even smiled, yet even abandoning a playful childhood and sealing such youthful joys before she turned ten couldn’t chase the coughing away. Thankfully, it was only during the harshest of winters (even if winters in Angfaran never got to the frigid temperatures of even the hottest Nevgarni summers) which Dhoyanha coughed up more than just air.

And the soft air, neither too humid nor too dry, neither too warm nor too cold, did lull Dhoyanha to sleep. At least, so she wished. Yet her eyelids stayed glued open, as if Aro herself blew her tempests all to keep the young Rachya from drifting off into her dreams. Dhoyanha bolted up, bracing her chest and back as she issued forth a bout of coughs. She felt dizzy. She shook her head and blindly reached for a gourd bottle, instinctively knocking the cap off and jamming its opening right up to her mouth. The gush of tea for her lungs, splashing around her as she could do nothing but cough more before she could even take the first mouthful, did little to soothe her throat and her always-demanding lungs, weak as they were, than they wet the bedding around her as well as much of her simple white nightgown, which now hung damp around her gaunt yet well-developed frame.

Dhoyanha took some more tea from the bottle and wet her hands, pitifully rinsing her face and her horns. She lay back down, having accomplished nothing but make herself look like an idiot. Good thing was that the privileges of being the Rachya included complete privacy in your bed-chambers, huge as even that was. She could always put in dungeons or exile to the jungles anyone who did see.

She shut her eyes, after coughing some more. She would continue to stay awake, evident by how she noticed the room’s glow shifting from a soft blue to a harsh orange.

========

Sorahnpu, Ivory Palace, Throne Room

As Dhoyanha entered the lofty chamber, all attendants focused their gaze on her and lowered to both knees, fully prostrating themselves before Angfaran’s High Glory the Rachya. She met their bows with expectance, nodding in acceptance. The congregation before her stood, silent and waiting for their Rachya’s words.

The hall was wide, tall, and spacious. Open arches to the outside let in a perpetual, cool breeze, yet even the harshest winds could not extinguish the pillars’ torchlight. Curtains draped over overhangs, providing a rather aesthetic shield against the heat. The floor was rather empty, if it weren’t for the masses of servants, soldiers, and advisors of the palace. This crowd was gathered on one side of the room, towards the front end of the palace, whereas Dhoyanha and the towering platform on which her wide, lavish throne rested, where she now approached with trained regality bred into her for years on end, were to the rear of the room. It was her and then everyone else. Only the highest ranks of the Kushatryi Guard lined the wall behind the throne. Only they kept her company, as even the nearest, neatly standing rows of advisors were meters from the throne.

Dhoyanha turned, having fully ascended the platform, and sat on her throne. She wore her ceremonial dress, as always. A dawn-colored dress, with a muted golden sheen, fit over her body, both the bodice and the skirt fitting close to her figure. Articles of golden jewelry hung from her waist, shoulders, and ears. Her dress’ sleeves continued to fit rather closely until the elbows, where they flourished and trailed down past her hooves and onto the floor with complementing hues of deep scarlet and indigo, like the receding darkness of the morning sky. On her head, between her horns, rested her crown, a tall golden spire like Okina Yama towering above the foothills of golden patterns and images, most notable of which being a wavelike structure at her brow, on which jewels sat like multiple eyes of the mountain’s base.

Dhoyanha’s face was elaborately and painstakingly detailed. She always despised this part about her ceremonial dress, although it was always fun to put together her gown. The handmaidens would always make Dhoyanha uncomfortable with how they put on her make-up, so Dhoyanha had it so there was nothing more than a foundation and crimson lips, from the finest jungle roses. Still, all the make-up in the world could never hide her defined cheekbones, rising from her face not out of strength but out of weakness. Fine as she was, her gown could not hide her frailty, to the silent realization of all who had ever attended as the Rachya’s audience.

What hid her frailty was her demeanor. Even after this chain of sleepless nights, Dhoyanha commanded authority, her chest held high at her throne and her almost disinterested face holding sovereignty over everyone in the room. Her large, silver eyes swept slowly across her assembled audience, observing the court with a mixture of condescending compassion and regal indifference. Her lips, as if carved into stone, were small and emotionless, exhibiting this truth in her life that made even the most defiant attendant dare not utter his dissent: although her very body was working against her, she feared nothing. If anything, there was nothing in the Rachykhina to fear but her.

After all, who was this frail young Gorrin woman sitting on the throne aside from the High Glory the Rachya of Angfaran? The chosen Divine Archon of Aro, heir to the glories of the Right Hand of the Yuannon? From her mighty father to Dhoyanha herself, the title was sacred.

“As Rachya over this fair land with which the Sün have blessed us, I call this session into action,” Dhoyanha calmly announced with her light, airy voice. Still, in it undeniably lay authority, the kind that made all direct their ears to her. Even if the meaning of her words was lost, her voice commanded obedience, and something within you simply had to comply.

“Please present the first item of the court’s agenda,” she requested, still with that tender, authoritative voice.

A general, clad in black-as-night plate armor with ridges and edges accented with gold, stepped forward. The armor extended past his broad shoulders, ending just shy of his elbows, golden bracers providing protection for his forearms. At his waist, ridged skirt armor protruded over his thighs, ending there as royal green baggy silk trousers extended to his hocks, tightly cuffed at the joint with orange highlights. The rest of his bulky legs, fur white as snow, were left bare, as he walked forward and knelt before his Rachya. His hooves were perpetually stained brown and green, the result of endless campaigns in the deserts, jungles, and alpine environments spanning the island of Fahuatai. On his head, he wore a solid gold conical helmet, topped with a long spike protruding directly skyward, with a forward-facing brim that still gave ample room for his large, curling horns, each almost as big as his head. His beard was long and curled, either a haphazard attempt at self-care or through neglect, choosing instead to focus on his armor.

“Yes, High Rachya,” he responded, his hoarse bleat-like voice sounding much like the sands on which he frequently fought. “Persisting still is the war against the Kerboutay. The status quo has much remained; although little pockets of territory continue to be exchanged day after day, a front has largely been determined along the Chuyudi Ridge.” The Chuyudi Ridge extended to cleave the island in two, giving the Kerboutay a natural barrier against Angfaran advances, although Angfaran was left with all but the panhandle of the island. “The Kerboutay have not ceased in their efforts to establish a peace with the Chuyudi Ridge serving as the border.”

Dhoyanha sighed. The war had been going on long enough. She did not even know how it had started. Even her father was but a mere inheritor of a long line of Rachyas as not only sovereigns but wartime leaders. All that she did know was that tens of thousands lay dead on either side, and countless villages were lost to the flames of war. Perhaps it was time to sign a truce. The push to the deserts around Oishi had been costly, and for what? Only two years later, the Kerboutay managed to rally enough men—and good fortune—to push all the way back. The counteroffensive put the sounds of warfare within earshot of Sorahnpu’s outskirts. It was when Father had died trying to push the front away from the Ivory Jewel of the Rachykhina. It had worked, but it also put a fifteen-year-old Dhoyanha on the throne as the next Rachya. She had yet to forgive Father for dying.

“Have their terms for surrender changed?” Dhoyanha mused. The Kerboutay were always greedy for their terms, always seeking land up to eyesight of Sorahnpu, which was unacceptable.

“Yes, Rachya,” the general replied. Dhoyanha was stunned. Even her coughs, which she felt brewing in her chest, were chased away by this development. “They will take a border at the Chuyudi Ridge in exchange for complete autonomy.” The general’s eyes darkened. Dhoyanha could only assume he was not ready to see decades of fighting, killing rebels, only to see their goal achieved, even if only partially.

“One thing I shall not grant for them is autonomy,” Dhoyanha declared with confidence. The chamber was silent. Although it was an open-air throne room, the arrays of columns and walls carried her voice through resounding echo, as if her voice was like a thunderbird’s piercing screech, heard by all beneath. “We have lost too many men, villages, and years to concede to them their ultimate wish. However, we both agree that the killing must end.” She took a shaky breath, stifling a bout of coughing. In light of these changes, I shall personally attend this week’s peace delegation.”

The court suddenly erupted with murmurs and whispers running amok. Dhoyanha grabbed her royal scepter, coated solid gold and with the design of the Angfar jungle star lily, and thudded its base on the throne’s platform only once. The crowd went immediately silent. “Silence,” Dhoyanha commanded, still with her soft voice. She could afford not to articulate anything louder against the risk of her collapsing and coughing madly, as she accidentally did a few years ago.

“High Rachya,” an advisor stepped forward. He was wearing a long, trailing robe with elaborate patterns over a pink and green tunic and baggy trousers. He was bald, wearing no headwear of any sort, something advisors abstained from. He knelt, melodramatically bowing with an exaggerated briskness. “These delegations occur right before the enemy! Aro knows how dangerous it is for a Rachya to travel there, let alone outside of Sorahnpu to begin with—”

“Are you suggesting that your Rachya lacks the physical capability to go outside and talk?” Dhoyanha asked softly. There was no trace of malice or fury in her voice, merely cold professionalism.

Still, that frightened the advisor. “N-n-n-n-n-not-not at all, H-H-High Rachya,” he stammered. “I-it’s just that so soon after losing the previous High Rachya—”

“And now you speak of my father’s death in this context?” Dhoyanha’s voice began to show a hint of anger.

The advisor’s face flushed pure white and he was unable to speak. He merely planted his face deeper against the flower-tiled palace floors out of mortification.

In a kinder tone, Dhoyanha sighed. “Still, I understand your concern, Advisor. I shall request that for the first time, a detachment of the Kushatryi Guard, as well as double the retinue of diplomats and escorting soldiers, shall be sent for my protection.”

The courtly audience simultaneously bowed. “Your will as Aro’s, High Rachya,” the front row, all advisors and military officials, responded humbly in unison.

========

Somewhere along the Chuyudi Ridge

The Gorrin-propelled chariot decelerated to a stop. Highly ornate, with its red base almost gaudily decorated with gold highlights and upward points about every corner, the chariot’s wheels provided little comfort against the rough terrain from Sorahnpu to the Chuyudi Ridge, but at least the constant bumps masked Dhoyanha’s coughing and wheezing. It was like a large throne platform on wheels, essentially a version of her throne in Sorahnpu made portable. Obviously, it was more for ceremonial use rather than being anything practical.

Before the Angfar delegation was a sprawl of war tents, with horses, weapons, and supplies about the grounds. Dhoyanha stood and descended the chariot as its bearers stepped to the side and bowed as she came forward. She still had to heavily lean against the stair railings of the chariot, stepping down with slender, black legs, her hooves still having trouble coordinating against the efforts of her chest and her head, still spinning from the rough journey. Dhoyanha still wore her ceremonial wear from the throne room. She quickly readjusted her crown as she reached the base of the chariot and then the ground. She continued to move forwards, diplomats, Kushatryi, military officials, and soldiers following her closely, three-pointed tasseled spears flying high in the air.

Out of the largest war tent, the one closest to the Angfar delegation, came a group of Kerboutay soldiers, clad in dark grey lamellar and plate armor over deep red and indigo tunics. They wore small, dome-like helmets that fit between their horns, black like the night above. Feather spouted from the tips of each. On their waists hung thick curved sabers.

The Kerboutay stopped only a few meters from Dhoyanha and knelt, courteously bowing. Dhoyanha returned the gesture, bowing fully at the waist while curtsying. “High Rachya, we represent the Cuan Chih Dhao, the noble and valiant warriors aiming for sovereignty, even if only up to the Chou Ye Dia Ridge,” the head among them, Dhoyanha assumed to be the commander, announced confidently, with a strong, haughty voice. It was strange to hear him localize the Chuyudi Ridge as so, let alone use assumedly their own name for themselves. Cuan Chih Dhao. Likely to have more meaning than Kerboutay—southern insurgents.

“And you are…?” Dhoyanha nonchalantly trailed.

“Ah yes, how could I be so rude?” the commander chuckled. Standing from his kneel, followed by the rest of his men, he introduced himself. “My name is Nheng Hru Suut, commander of the armed forces of the Cuan Chih Dhao. I do not consider myself to be the greatest tactician out there, but I must admit that my pride has fallen quite a bit when the rallying point my men were being killed by seems to be a frail woman inches from drowning in her own saliva and urine,” he added with a cruel chuckle.

Immediately, Kushatryi guards leaped in front of her, their black and gold armor reflecting the torches of the enemy camp. They swung their tasseled polearms in front of the Rachya, making a X-shaped barrier before their leader and glaring at the indignant Kerboutay through ornate flaps from their pointed golden helmets.

Commander Nheng laughed aloud derisively, as his men reacted in much the same way. “Even in talks of peace, we show such animosities. A tragic world, isn’t it?”

“Even the lowest criminals would not dare to show such disrespect to me,” Dhoyanha quietly simmered.

“Ah yes, my apologies that I, as the representative of the ‘traitorous rebels’ you so flatteringly call us the ‘Kerboutay’ cannot find it in myself to voice my deepest respects,” Nheng chuckled again.

“Perhaps ‘Father-killers’ would be a more apt name,” Dhoyanha coolly responded.

“How mature,” Nheng made a sarcastic sad face. His ash-brown beard, reaching all the way around his cheeks and chin wavered with suppressed, ridiculing glee. “We could easily retort onto you the same thing. I’m aware of how the last High Rachya died. To be fair, it was quite the heroic death. I, unfortunately, could not have been so honored as to slay him myself, the honor going to my superior. I idolized him for his glory in taking the life of our enemy. I’m sure the b*stard who took his life is experiencing a similar glory as we speak.”

Dhoyanha trembled with rage. Immediately her body fought back, and she fell to her knees, coughing and desperately reaching for air. A Kushatryi Guard at each side instinctively reached for each of her arms, but, still coughing, she stayed them with her hands, standing slowly on her own. Her dress was partially sullied by the dirt on which she fell.

Nheng’s face bore a confliction of sadistic humor and pitiful mortification. Even he must’ve curbed his insults at such an opponent. Which Dhoyanha hated. Angfaran and this “Cuan Chih Dhao” were sworn enemies, and what infuriated Dhoyanha the most was the suppression of honest hatred and scorn. A thousand insults and curses were as blessings compared to a single stifled one, out of some holier-than-thou sense of pity. That was the ultimate insult, the ultimate curse. As she stood, her face bore little change, but in her eyes now brewed a maelstrom of anger. Anger she chose to suppress. “I came today because you proposed a change in your usual attempts at peace.

“Ah, yes,” Nheng also composed himself, adopting his usual scornful smile. “We would be greatly honored by the High Will of Aro accepting an armistice and subsequent deal along the Chou Ye Dia Ridge. We seem to tire of the pointless death as you do, previously thought impossible. We didn’t even think you were Gorrin until recently.” Dhoyanha had to actively bite down on her tongue to suppress a retort, over her already-tarnished image as High Rachya. “We shall also give compensation: ten percent of all of our aggregate resource income for a year, in exchange for complete, irrevocable autonomy.”

“We cannot accept your sovereignty. This is to be one island, one unified power on Fahuatai, one Angfaran,” Dhoyanha coldly answered. “We may grant greater autonomy under my crown, but it is under my crown where you must remain. Too many on our side have died to let anything else occur.”

“And what do you think our dead gave their lives for?” Nheng retorted, raising his voice. “It seems the ghosts of those passed on either side do not intend for this war to end with a truce, on either end.”

“It does not seem that way,” Dhoyanha agreed solemnly.

One of the men next to Nheng made a guttural noise, then slumped, then fell completely to the ground. Nheng approached him cautiously, then turned him over. An arrow protruded from his throat.

“You…” Nheng turned to Dhoyanha in fury. “Using peace to eliminate the top brass with your honor to sacrifice?” He stood, walking towards her with fire in his eyes.

“No, no,” Dhoyanha stammered. An arrow? From her direction? No, that was wrong. This was a peace mission, and a Kerboutay soldier had died. An Angfar soldier? Could an Angfaruc have killed him? “I didn’t—” she was interrupted as Nheng grabbed her shoulder through the Kushatryi Guard with a strong, calloused hand. The Kushatryi at the front immediately sliced down upon Nheng’s wrist, severing his hand completely and freeing Dhoyanha. They kicked the Kerboutay commander away and moved to surround the High Rachya, moving as one unit back to the chariot.

“No, who fired!?” Dhoyanha cried above the chaos. “Who—!?” she coughed once more, collapsing onto the ground.

A Kushatryi reached to the ground, pulling her up and hoisting her arm around his shoulders. “High Rachya, are you all right?” he cried above the now-growing chaos. The Kerboutay were mobilizing, sending arrows back as Angfar arrows increased in intensity in retaliation.

“No, who would dare sabotage this attempt at peace?” Dhoyanha heard herself demand, but her heart knew differently. There was a moment of perfect understanding before that Kerboutay soldier fell, when she and Nheng looked each other in the eye. Each knew, perfectly well, that there would be no victory, no end to this until Sorahnpu fell or the entire island was crushed under the Angfar heel.

Whoever fired the shot would be executed, Dhoyanha thought to herself as her head started to spin and as coughs racked up against her. But the arrow was a grace that killed the farce of peace and that would lead the way to true, everlasting peace: peace through more killing, more violence, and more conquest. Instead of an idle, simmering war, this war would revive into total barbarism once more.

Dhoyanha could stop pretending for peace. For the sake of the future of Fahuatai, of Angfaran and the legacy of the Yuannon, she had to see the war to its end. By force and by might.

I’m sorry, Father, for ever thinking this could work, and for dishonoring you in this way. Even if the war must end in such a horrid way, let me end it for you.

Dhoyanha’s vision blurred to blackness, and her mind went numb, as screams of terror and death drowned to a nothingness around her.

The Pink Seas and Eskeland

The Octava "Rebellion"

Ruby Plaza, Octava

A crowd of people stood and stared as a man dressed in soldier's armour delivered a speech. He was passionate about it and anyone who passed by would be attracted to listen in. The guards allowed him to continue, he was not any ordinary person, he was the margrave's son, Emil, yet his speech was of hate, of hate against his father and the way he had been managing the Margraviate. The soldiers did not react to it as they also supported most of what he said.

From his stool he spoke," Why must we continue to tolerate what the central government wants? Why must we continue to do their bidding yet be neglected by them at the same time? We don't have to, they own us. Ever since this humble and hardworking town was founded, we have been the protectors of the kingdom's northern border, yet what have they ever done for us? We sacrifice ourselves everyday to keep the borderlands safe from anything and yet we are left to fend for ourselves, because they refuse to send us aid. If anyone asks me this is unacceptable.

The crowd cheered as they agreed with Emil's words, one of those in the crowd raised his hand to ask a question, "But aren't you the son of the margrave? Why are you doing this?"

"I do it because I care, and unlike my father who has gotten all comfortable with the authorities back in Tidahamn for his own gain, I haven't been bought by them and I refuse to be."

"But then, what are ye planning to do, sire?" Said another one.

"That is a very good question my good man. I plan to turn things around for the better of course, get the economy back on its feet again, give more rights to those that deserve it, and actually listen to the requests of the people."

"And how do you plan to achieve this?" A young woman holding her baby asked.

"Independence! The people have the right to choose their own fate, as dictated by Iskren."

"Iskren? I don't believe in that Iskren fella. I don't know about any of you, but he just seems like another form of Miskunn. Are you one of Miskunn's followers?" Asked another peasant inquisitively.

The inquisitive crowd looked at Emil waiting for an answer, "No, no, of course not, haha... you know I only... Uhh... " Emil cleared his throat, "Like I was saying, the gods gave us the right to follow our own faith, as it was written in the sagas."

"The sagas? Never read those. Does it say that in the sagas? Well I can't read to begin with, I only believe what the priests tell me." He said, scratching his chin pensively.

"Hmm... Can't read either but I believe the priest at the temple said somethin' about working in the fields."

"No, that doesn't seem right, I think it was drinking a lot and enjoying life. Yeah it must have been that! Let us all drink in the name of the gods!" The crowd cheered at the man's words.
Emil couldn't help but facepalm hearing the crowd talk , "Alright everyone listen, I have read them, I know how to read, and it says what I said."

"We know you know how to read sire, but I'm still not entirely convinced about this. I never trusted those books much."

"Can't believe this." He sighed, "Fine, the priest confirmed it as well, Happy now?"

"Well why didn't you say so sire? To arms!" And the crowd cheered with emotion once more, picking up pitchforks, shovels, rakes and whatever they could find along the way as they followed Emil to the castle to meet with the margrave and demand his abdication, peacefully or forcefully. However their visit to the palace would be met by no one, the margrave wasn't there, the guards told them he had left days prior and would not come back until days later. This left Emil wondering where his father had gone without telling him.

---------

3 Days Before

"Helena! Where is my hunting bow? It is not on its display."

"I believe I saw Emmerich take it, he is in the courtyard practicing."

"Of course he did, why does he always have to take it?" Friedrich sighed, "I guess it's about time I teach him how to hunt, he is seventeen already after all. Helena, I am taking Emmerich to go on a hunting trip. We will spend some days in the forest with another group of nobles, hopefully this time we will be able to catch that beast."

"Are you talking about that white stag you are so infatuated with? That is just a myth, why don't you simply hunt normal deer or elk."

"Impossible! It is real, I can feel it, and we are closer than ever to hunting it down. The only things that always stop us from doing so are those damn forest bandits trying to protect it, saying it is sacred. Bah! We shall see how sacred it is when his head hangs atop of my throne in the hall."

"Well alright dear, oh and before I forget me and Theresa are going to Skarhamn, we are spending some days with my mother at her estate. I think it is about time we paid her a visit, she keeps sending me letters wanting us to come."

"Good luck with that then and since you are going to Skarhamn, could you bring me the sword I commissioned from the blacksmith? I believe it should be ready by now. I would pick it up myself but I can't skip this year's hunt."

"I swear, hunting is going to consume your soul." Helena sighed, "But alright I will see if I can pick it up. Then what about Emil?"

"What about him? I haven't seen him in days, but who cares? He can take care of himself, he is a man already after all. You know, my father left me alone in a forest to find my way back to the castle when I was eight years old, he is twenty. So I trust he knows what he is doing, and anyhow, it's just for a few days. What is he going to do in such a short time, get himself killed by a bandit or a thief? I don't think so, anyways, I am leaving, see you in a few days, take care."

Helena sighed, "You too dear, be careful with the wolves and other creatures."

"Ha! They are the ones who should be careful of me." Emmerich left the room laughing to himself.

---------

Back to the present

"What do we do now?" Asked one of the peasants.

"I guess I just take over, just like that. This was somehow easier than I expected... I guess you can all return your normal lives now. I shall select some amongst you, who shall help me bring our new country to fruition." Emil raised his arms in sign of victory over what was probably the silliest moments in the history of Octava. But Emil was nonetheless pleased that he took over that easily.

Hours after taking over, Emil was in the main hall of the castle, together with other people, planning and smoothing out the details of the new government they were going to set up. In his mind, Emil had planned a government less autocratic, but with some aristocratic elements. He would be interrupted by a guard that came into the room asking Emil to go outside because someone wanted to see him. Emil followed him outside to find his father looking rather angry.

"Emil! What is the meaning of this? Where is your mother and sister? Why are the guards not allowing me in? Let me inside the castle now! I hope this is not a prank of yours" Shouted Friedrich at him.

"I don't think so father, the Margraviate is mine now, mother and sister are not here either, so go back to the king's court where you belong, together with the rest of the pigs that answer to him." Emil answered back at him from the top of one of the walls of the castle.

"What?! What did you say to me? How dare you say that to me boy! And who said the Margraviate was yours? The king won't recognise you as the margrave for as long as I am alive."

"Oh? But who said I was going to answer to the king?"

"No? Then who will you answer to, the gods?" Friedrich laughed.

"We are not going to answer to anyone! We are declaring ourselves independent and establishing a republic!"

"A what? Come again? I certainly hope your mother did not drop you when you were a baby. That is madness boy, a republic? I would understand if you called yourself King of the Fools but a republic, by the gods... And who is going to support you in this idiotic endeavour of yours?"

"Mikhail, King of the Eskelians! I vowed to support him if he supported me and that is exactly what he did."

Friedrich's face turned into one of disappointment, "Alright so let me get this straight boy, you want to declare independence, establish a republic, support that traitor? Now I am certain that she dropped you. Everyday you become a bigger disappointment to the family. Just let me in before I tell the guards to hang you from your neck or I will do it myself."

"Guards? The guards don't answer to you any longer father."

"Is that so? Guards arrest him and open the gates immediately!" But the guards did not respond to his words, "What are you doing? Arrest him!"

"Sorry sire, but we answer to him now, he promised to increase our pay." Said one of the soldiers guarding the gate.

"So this is how it is then, fine, very well, keep it, do whatever you want, but heed my words boy, I will come back with an army and restore order, and once that happens I will personally put you in your place. Emmerich let's go, I guess you are the heir now."

Emil once more claimed a victory against his father, and happily so, but if his words were to be believed, then he wouldn't last long governing his new republic wouldn't last long. Emil would have to prepare himself and his new country for what was about to come.

Ryeongse

«12. . .216217218219220221222. . .236237»

Advertisement